B ES1330L ES1530L JLG Service English

Download as pdf or txt
Download as pdf or txt
You are on page 1of 226

Service & Maintenance Manual

Model
ES1330L, ES1530L
PVC 2104

31217455
July 27, 2021 - Rev B

ANSI ©
Copyright
AS/NZS GB MOL 70
INTRODUCTION - MAINTENANCE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

GENERAL
This section contains the general safety precautions which must be observed during maintenance of the mobile elevating work
platform. It is of utmost importance that maintenance personnel pay strict attention to these warnings and precautions to avoid possible
injury to themselves or others, or damage to the equipment. A maintenance program must be followed to ensure that the machine is
safe to operate.

WARNING
Modification or alteration of a mobile elevating work platform shall be made only
with written permission from the manufacturer.

The specific precautions to be observed during maintenance are inserted at the appropriate point in the manual. These precautions are,
for the most part, those that apply when servicing hydraulic and larger machine component parts.
Your safety, and that of others, is the first consideration when engaging in the maintenance of equipment. Always be conscious of
weight. Never attempt to move heavy parts without the aid of a mechanical device. Do not allow heavy objects to rest in an unstable
position. When raising a portion of the equipment, ensure that adequate support is provided.

WARNING
Since the machine manufacturer has no direct control over the field inspection and
maintenance, safety in this area responsibility of the owner/operator.

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM SAFETY


It should be noted that the machines hydraulic systems operate at extremely high potentially dangerous pressures. Every effort should
be made to relieve any system pressure prior to disconnecting or removing any portion of the system.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 3


Introduction - Maintenance Safety Precautions

MAINTENANCE

WARNING
Failure to comply with safety precautions listed in this section could result in
machine damage, personnel injury or death and is a safety violation.

• Ensure replacement parts or components are identical or equivalent to original parts or components

• No smoking is mandatory. Never refuel during electrical storms. Ensure that fuel cap is closed and secure at all other times.

• Remove all rings, watches and jewelry when performing any maintenance.

• Do not wear long hair unrestrained, or loose-fitting clothing and neckties which are apt to become caught on or entangled in
equipment.

• Observe and obey all warnings and cautions on machine and in service manual.

• Keep oil, grease, water, etc. Wiped from standing surfaces and hand holds.

• Use caution when checking a hot, pressurized coolant system.

• Never work under an elevated scissor until platform has been safely restrained from any movement by blocking or overhead sling, or
safety prop has been engaged.

• Before making adjustments, lubricating or performing any other maintenance, shut off all power controls.

• Battery should always be disconnected during replacement of electrical components.

• Keep all support equipment and attachments stowed in their proper place.

• Use only approved, nonflammable cleaning solvents.

4 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


REVISION LOG

DATE REVISION DESCRIPTION


April 12, 2021 A Original Issue

July 27, 2021 B Revised

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 5


This Page is intentionally left blank

6
SECTION CONTENTS
Section Subject Page

INTRODUCTION - MAINTENANCE SAFETY PRECAUTIONS ..................................................................... 3

REVISION LOG ............................................................................................................................................... 5


SECTION 1
SPECIFICATIONS ......................................................................................................................................... 11
1.1 General Specifications ......................................................................................................... 12
1.2 Limit Switches .................................................................................................................... 16
1.3 Lubrication ........................................................................................................................ 17
1.4 Hydraulic Pressure Settings .................................................................................................. 19
1.5 Hydraulic Cylinder Specifications........................................................................................... 19
1.6 Critical Stability Weights ...................................................................................................... 20
1.7 Major Component Weights .................................................................................................. 20
1.8 Torque Requirements .......................................................................................................... 20
1.9 Serial Number Location........................................................................................................ 21
1.10 Threadlocking Compound.................................................................................................... 21
1.11 Torque Charts..................................................................................................................... 22

SECTION 2
GENERAL ...................................................................................................................................................... 39
2.1 Machine Preparation, Inspection, and Maintenance ................................................................. 40
2.2 Preventive Maintenance and Inspection Schedule ................................................................... 41
2.3 Service Maintenance Components ........................................................................................ 45
2.4 Service and Guidelines......................................................................................................... 47
2.5 Lubrication and Information ................................................................................................. 49
2.6 Cylinder Drift Test ............................................................................................................... 50
2.7 Pins and Composite Bearing Repair Guidelines........................................................................ 50

SECTION 3
CHASSIS AND SCISSOR ARMS................................................................................................................... 53
3.1 Batteries and Hydraulic Component Compartments................................................................. 55
3.2 Battery Removal/Maintenance .............................................................................................. 56
3.3 Battery Charging................................................................................................................. 59
3.4 Logic Control Module Installation.......................................................................................... 63
3.5 Main Power Contactor Relay and Drive Control Module............................................................ 65
3.6 Drive Control Module .......................................................................................................... 66
3.7 Drive Module Electrical Evaluation......................................................................................... 68
3.8 Traction System .................................................................................................................. 69
3.9 Drive Motor Electrical Evaluation ........................................................................................... 70
3.10 Torque Hub........................................................................................................................ 71
3.11 Drive Hub .......................................................................................................................... 76

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 7


Section Contents

3.12 Drive Motor Cable Routing ................................................................................................... 77


3.13 Ground Control Station........................................................................................................ 79
3.14 Platform Control Station ...................................................................................................... 81
3.15 Tilt Sensor Installation.......................................................................................................... 86
3.16 Scissor Arm - Rotary Angle Sensor ......................................................................................... 87
3.17 Pothole Protection System Components ................................................................................ 89
3.18 Steer and Spindle Assembly Components............................................................................... 91
3.19 Arms and Platform Positioning and Support ........................................................................... 93
3.20 Platform Removal ............................................................................................................... 94
3.21 Scissor Arms Removal .......................................................................................................... 94

SECTION 4
BASIC HYDRAULIC INFORMATION AND SCHEMATICS .......................................................................127
4.1 Cylinders - Theory of Operation .......................................................................................... 128
4.2 Valves - Theory of Operation............................................................................................... 128
4.3 Pump/Motor .................................................................................................................... 129
4.4 Cylinder Checking Procedure.............................................................................................. 137
4.5 Lift Cylinder Removal......................................................................................................... 138
4.6 Lift Cylinder Repair............................................................................................................ 142
4.7 Hydraulic Schematics. ........................................................................................................ 148

SECTION 5
JLG CONTROL SYSTEM.............................................................................................................................149
5.1 Hand Held Analyzer........................................................................................................... 150
5.2 Joystick Calibration ........................................................................................................... 156
5.3 Tilt Sensor Calibration........................................................................................................ 157
5.4 Rotary Angle Sensor Calibration .......................................................................................... 158
5.5 Factory Reset.................................................................................................................... 158
5.6 Updating Software ............................................................................................................ 159
5.7 Machine Configuration Programming Information................................................................. 166
5.8 Machine Model Adjustment (Personality Settings) ................................................................. 168

SECTION 6
LSS LOAD SENSING SYSTEM SERVICE ...................................................................................................171
6.1 LSS (Load Sensing System) ................................................................................................. 172

SECTION 7
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES ...............................................................................................................181
7.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 182
7.2 Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) .......................................................................................... 182
7.3 DTC Table ........................................................................................................................ 182

SECTION 8
GENERAL ELECTRICAL INFORMATION AND SCHEMATICS .................................................................199
8.1 General ........................................................................................................................... 201
8.2 Multimeter Basics.............................................................................................................. 201
8.3 Applying Silicone Dielectric Compound to Amp Connectors ................................................... 204

8 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Section Contents

8.4 Dielectric Grease Application .............................................................................................. 204


8.5 AMP Connector ................................................................................................................ 207
8.6 Working With Deutsch Connectors ...................................................................................... 211
8.7 Switches .......................................................................................................................... 213
8.8 Electrical Schematics ......................................................................................................... 215

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 9


This Page is intentionally left blank

10
SECTION 1
SPECIFICATIONS

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS ...................................................................................................................12
1.1.1 Operating Specification ...................................................................................................... 12
1.1.2 Platform Capacities ............................................................................................................ 13
1.1.3 Machine Dimensional Data ................................................................................................. 14
1.1.4 Tires ................................................................................................................................ 14
1.1.5 Batteries ........................................................................................................................... 14
1.1.6 Motors ............................................................................................................................. 15
1.1.7 Battery Charger ................................................................................................................. 15
1.2 LIMIT SWITCHES ..................................................................................................................................16
1.2.1 Tilt Switch Activation ......................................................................................................... 16
1.2.2 High Drive Speed Cutback .................................................................................................. 17
1.3 LUBRICATION ......................................................................................................................................17
1.3.1 Lubrication Capacities ........................................................................................................ 17
1.3.2 Lubrication Specifications ................................................................................................... 17
1.3.3 Hydraulic Oil ..................................................................................................................... 17
1.4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SETTINGS..........................................................................................................19
1.5 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER SPECIFICATIONS................................................................................................19
1.6 CRITICAL STABILITY WEIGHTS ..............................................................................................................20
1.7 MAJOR COMPONENT WEIGHTS.............................................................................................................20
1.8 TORQUE REQUIREMENTS......................................................................................................................20
1.9 SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION ..................................................................................................................21
1.10 THREADLOCKING COMPOUND..............................................................................................................21
1.11 TORQUE CHARTS .................................................................................................................................22
1.11.1 SAE Fastener Torque Chart.................................................................................................. 22
1.11.2 Metric Fastener Torque Chart .............................................................................................. 34

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 11


Specifications

1.1 GENERAL SPECIFICATIONS

1.1.1 Operating Specification


DESCRIPTION ES1330L ES1530L
PLATFORM
Maximum Working Height 18 ft. 4 in. (5.6 m) 20 ft. 8 in. (6.3 m)

Maximum Platform Height (Ground to Platform Floor)

Stowed: 28.1 in. (0.71 m) 31.1 in. (0.79 m)


Elevated: 150.4 in. (3.82 m) 178.4 in. (4.53 m)
Safety Prob Engaged: 61.8 in (1.57 m) 76.2 in (1.93 m)

Platform Lift Up Time


No Load: 11-17 Seconds 13-19 Seconds
Rated Load: 14-20 Seconds 16-22 Seconds
Platform Lift Down Time
No Load: 11-17 Seconds 13-19 Seconds
120% Load: 10-16 Seconds 11-17 Seconds
Electronic Arm Guards Pause Height (CE/UKCA/GB 42 in. (1.06 m) 50 in. (1.28 m)
Only)

DRIVING
Maximum Allowable Operating Slope

(platform fully elevated)

Front to Back: 3° 3°
Side to Side (Indoor - AUS Market Only): 1.5° 2.5°

Side to Side (Indoor - All Other Market s): 1.75° 2.5°


Side to Side (Outdoor)*: 1.5° 1.5°
* In the Japan and AUS markets, ES1530L is rated for INDOOR USE only.

Elevated Drive Speed (FWD/REV) (Range) Sec/25 ft 32 - 42 / 35 - 45


(7.62 m)
Maximum Stowed Travel Grade (Gradeability) 25% (14°)

Maximum Stowed Travel Grade (Slide Slope) 8.75% (5°)

Elevated Drive Platform Height > 37.4 in. (> 0.94 m)


Turning Radius

Inside: 0 in. (0 m)
(Curb to Curb)Outside: 51.7 in. (1.317 m)
CHASSIS
Approximate Gross Machine Weight
ANSI/CE/UKCA/CSA/GB/AUS/CHN/KOR: 1975 lb (895 kg) 1935 lb (877.7 kg)

12 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

DESCRIPTION ES1330L ES1530L


PLATFORM
JPN: N/A 1740 lb (789.25 kg)

Wheelbase 42.3 in. (1.071 m)


Machine Overall Width 29.9 in. (0.76 m)
Machine Overall Length 57.5 in. (1.46 m)

Max. Tire Load 900 lb (408 kg)

Occupied Floor Area 10.98 ft2 (1.02 m2)


Ground Bearing Pressure
ANSI/CE/UKCA/CSA/GB/AUS/CHN/KOR: 119 psi (8.2 bar) 126 psi (8.68 bar)
JPN: N/A 114 psi (7.86 bar)

Ground Clearance
PHP Retracted: 2.4 in. (60 mm)
PHP Deployed: 0.78 in. (19.8 mm)

Breakover Angle 11.8°

1.1.2 Platform Capacities


DESCRIPTION ES1330L ES1530L
Operating Personnel

Indoor: 2 persons 1 person


Outdoor: 1 person

Platform Rated Load 500 lb (227 kg)


Extension Deck Rated Load 254 lb (115.21 kg)

Maximum Operating Wind Speed


Indoor: 0 mph (0 m/s)
Outdoor: 28 mph (12.5 m/s)
Maximum Horizontal Side Force (Indoor)
CE/UKCA: 90 lb (400 N) 45 lb (200 N)
Japan: – 40 lb (180 N)
All Other Markets: 90 lb (400 N) 45 lb (200 N)
Maximum Horizontal Side Force (Outdoor) 45 lb (200 N)

Note: INDOOR USE is use of a MEWP in areas shielded from wind so that there is no wind. OUTDOOR USE is use of a MEWP in an environment that can be exposed to wind.

Note: Machines with Indoor/Outdoor functionality are not available in Japan and AUS markets.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 13


Specifications

1.1.3 Machine Dimensional Data


DESCRIPTION ES1330L ES1530L
ANSI/CSA/CE/UKCA/AUS/GB/CHN/ KOR ANSI/CSA/CE/UKCA/AUS/GB/ JPN
CHN/KOR
Platform Height (Ground to Platform Floor)

Stowed: 28.1 in. (0.71 m) 31.1 in. (0.78 m)


Elevated: 150.4 in. (3.82 m) 178.4 in. (4.53 m)
Safety Prop Engaged: 61.8 in. (1.56 m) 76.2 in. (1.93 m)

Rail Height (Platform Floor to Top of Rail)


Fixed Rails: 43.8 in. (1.11 m) 39.9 in. (1.01 m) 39.9 in. (1.01 m)
Dual Rails: - 44 in. (1.11 m) -

Overall Machine Height (Stowed)

Fixed Rails: 70.8 in. (1.8 m) 70.8 in. (1.8 m) 70.8 in. (1.8 m)
Dual Rails: - 74.8 in. (1.9 m) -

Overall Machine Height (Elevated)

Fixed Rails: 193.7 in. (4.91 m) 218.5 in. (5.54 m) 218.5 in. (5.54 m)
Dual Rails: - 222.4 in. (5.64 m) -

Platform Size - Length (Inside) 70.1 in. (1.78 m)

Platform Size - Width (Inside) 24.1 in. (0.61 m)


Extension Deck Length 21.7 in (0.55 m)

Wheelbase 42.3 in. (1.07 m)

1.1.4 Tires
DESCRIPTION ES1330L, ES1530L
Size (Front and Rear) 10 x 3 in. (25.4 x7.6 cm)
Wheel bolt Torque 43 ft. lbs. (58 Nm)

1.1.5 Batteries
DESCRIPTION Lead Acid AGM
Voltage (24V System - Series) 12 V per battery

Amp Hour Rating 130 AH @20 HR. Rate 115 AH @20 HR. Rate
Reserve Capacity 225 Minutes @25 amps 235 Minutes @25 amps

Weight 66.1 lb (30 Kg) 70.5 lb (32 Kg)

14 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

1.1.6 Motors
Drive Motors
Type: DC
Voltage: 24 V
Rated Output Power: 0.4 kW (0.53 hp)
Rated Speed: 4600 rpm
Electric Brake
Type: Electric Brake
Static Friction Torque: 6 Nm
Rated Voltage: 24 V
Rated Power: 20 W
Hydraulic Pump/Electric Motor
Motor Type: 24V DC
Motor Power: 2.2 kW
Pump Displacement: 3.15 cc/rev

Pump Pressure: 2500 psi Continuous


3000 psi Intermittent

NOTICE
JLG machines equipped with Delta Q battery chargers are designed for the best
performance with OEM factory approved batteries.
Approved JLG replacement batteries are available through JLG’s aftermarket parts
distribution centers or JLG's aftermarket programs. For assistance with proper
battery replacement, please contact your local JLG support office.
Batteries approved by JLG have been tested for compatibility with the algorithm
programming of the delta q battery charger to optimize battery life and machine
cycle times. The use of non approved batteries in your JLG equipment may result in
performance issues or battery charger fault codes. JLG assumes no responsibility for
service or performance issues arising from the use of non approved batteries.

1.1.7 Battery Charger

DESCRIPTION ALL MACHINES


Electrical System Voltage (DC) 24V

Battery Charger: Delta-Q Green Power


Input:
AC Input Voltage: 85-270 VAC 85-265 VAC

Nominal AC Input Voltage: 100 - 240 VAC 120 - 230 VAC


Input Frequency: 50-60 Hz 50-60 Hz

Max. AC Input Current: 7.5 A 6A


Ingress Protection: IP66 NEMA4 IP66

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 15


Specifications

DESCRIPTION ALL MACHINES


Operating Temperature: -40°F (-40°C) to 149°F (+65°C) -40°F (-40°C) to 149°F (+65°C)
Output:
Nominal DC Output Voltage: 24 V 24 V

Max. DC Output Voltage: 36 V 34 V

Max DC Output Current: 16.5 A 15 A


Max. Interlock Current: 1A @ 24 V 5A @ 24 V
Protection:
Output Reverse Polarity: Electronic Protection - Auto Reset Electronic Protection - Auto Reset

Output Short Circuit: Current Limited Electronic Protection - Auto Reset


AC Overload: Current Limited Current Limited
DC Overload: Current Limited Current Limited

1.2 LIMIT SWITCHES

1.2.1 Tilt Switch Activation


Note: When the tilt indicator warning is activated the following functions are affected; Platform Lowered: Only Drive Allowed.
Platform Raised: Drive and lift up functions are disabled, platform must be fully lowered (stowed) to drive out of tilt condition.

WARNING
If the tilt indicator warning light/alarm is activated when platform is raised, lower
platform and drive to a smooth firm surface within the limits of the maximum
operating slope.

MODEL TILT SETTING Y-Axis (front to back) TILT SETTING X-Axis (side to side) Maximum Deck Elevation
- 1.5° 11 ft to 13 ft (Indoor) (AUS)
- 1.5° 11 ft to elevated pos. (Indoor)(AUS)
- 1.75° 13 ft - 11 ft (Indoor) (ANSI, CHN, CE, UKCA, CSA)
ES1330L
- 2.25° 11 ft to Full elevation (Indoor) (ANSI, CHN, CE, UKCA, CSA)
- 1.5° 13 ft to full elev. (Outdoor)
3° - Elevated
- 2.5° 13 ft to 15 ft (Indoor)
- 11 ft to 13 ft (Indoor)
3.25°
ES1530L - 11 ft to Full Elevation (Indoor)
- 1.5° 10 ft to elevated (ANSI, CE, UKCA, CSA, CHN) (Outdoor)
3° - Elevated

16 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

1.2.2 High Drive Speed Cutback


High drive speed is cutback when the platform is raised above the preset height per model as follows:

MODEL HIGH DRIVE SPEED CUTBACK HEIGHT DRIVE SPEED REDUCTION


ES1330 L/ES1530L 37.4 in. (0.95 m) 2.3 mph (3.8 kph) to 0.5 mph (0.8 kph)

1.3 LUBRICATION

1.3.1 Lubrication Capacities

COMPONENT ES1330L/ES1530L
Hydraulic Reservoir (at Full mark) 1.32 Gal. (5 L)
Hydraulic System (Including Reservoir) 1.45 Gal. (5.5 L)

1.3.2 Lubrication Specifications


KEY SPECIFICATIONS
MPG Multipurpose Grease having a minimum dripping point of 350° F. Excellent water resistance and adhesive qualities, and being of extreme pressure type.
(Timken OK 40 pounds minimum.)
EPGL Extreme Pressure Gear Lube (oil) meeting API service classification
GL-5 or MIL-Spec MIL-L-2105.
HO JLG Recommends - Mobil - Mobilfluid 424
Mobil EAL ENVIRONSYN H 32
Mobil SHC HYDRAULIC EAL 32

Note: EAL and SHC are compatible with each other.

1.3.3 Hydraulic Oil

HYDRAULIC SYSTEM OPERATING TEMPERATURE RANGE SAE VISCOSITY GRADE


0° F to +23° F (-18° C to -5° C) 10W
0° F to 210° F (-18° C to + 99° C) 10W-20, 10W-30
50° F to 210° F (+10° C to +99° C) 20W-20

Note: Aside from JLG recommendations, it is not advisable to mix oils of different brands or types, as they may not contain the same
required additives or be of comparable viscosities.

Table 1. Premium Hydraulic Fluid (VG 15) Specs


SPECIFICATION RECOMMENDED SHELL TELLUS S2 VX 15 OPTIONALMOBIL DTE 10 EXCEL 15
ISO Viscosity Grade 15 15

Specific Gravity .872 .837

Flash Point 392° F (200° C) 359.6° F (182° C)


Pour Point -44° F (-42° C) -65° F (-54° C)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 17


Specifications

Table 1. Premium Hydraulic Fluid (VG 15) Specs (continued)


SPECIFICATION RECOMMENDED SHELL TELLUS S2 VX 15 OPTIONALMOBIL DTE 10 EXCEL 15
Base Oil Type HV HV

Brookfield, cP at -40° C - 2620


VISCOSITY
at 40° C 15.14 cSt 15.60 cSt
at 100° C 3.70 cSt 4.04 cSt
Viscosity Index 135 169

Table 2. Bio Synthetic Hyd Fluid (VG 32) Specs


SPECIFICATION RECOMMENDED SHELL NATURELLE HF-E32 OPTIONAL MOBIL EAL ENVIROSYN H32
ISO Viscosity Grade 32 32
Specific Gravity 0.918 0.869
Flash Point 475° F (246° C) 514° F (268° C)
Pour Point -38° F (-39° C) -38° F (-39° C)
POLYOL ESTER FATTY ACID ESTER
Base Oil Type HEES -
HFDU -
Auto-Ignition Temp, ° C >320° C -
Biodegradability (% 28 Days) 79% >60%
VISCOSITY
at 40° C 30.78 cSt 33.59 cSt
at 100° C 6.85 cSt 6.41 cSt
Viscosity Index 192 146

18 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Figure 1. Hydraulic Oil Operating Temperature Specifications

Fluid Properties Base Classifications


Viscos- Viscos- Mineral Oils Vegetable Synthetic Synthetic Readily Virtually Fire Resisstant***
ity at ity Oils Polyol Esters Biodegrade- Non-toxic**
40°C Index able*
(oSt,
Typi-
cal)
Mobilfluid 424 55 145 X
Mobil EAL Envirosyn H 32 33 147 X X
Mobil DTE 10 Excel 32 32 164 X X
Mobil DTE 10 Excel 15 15 168 X X

1.4 HYDRAULIC PRESSURE SETTINGS

MODEL MAIN RELIEF STEER LEFT STEER RIGHT


ES1330L/ ES1530L 2530 ± 30 psi(174.4 ± 2.06 bar) 1000 psi(69 bar) 1000 psi(69 bar)

1.5 HYDRAULIC CYLINDER SPECIFICATIONS

DESCRIPTION ES1330L ES1530L


Lift Cylinder Bore Diameter

Outer: 72 mm (2.83 in.)


Inner: 60 mm (2.36 in.)
Lift Cylinder Stroke 713 ± 2 mm (28.07 ± 0.07 in.) 657 ± 2 mm (25.8 ± 0.07 in.)
Lift Cylinder Rod Diameter 40 mm (1.57 in.)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 19


Specifications

DESCRIPTION ES1330L ES1530L


Steer Cylinder Bore Diameter

Outer: 70 mm (2.75 in.)


Inner: 60 mm (2.36 in.)
Steer Cylinder Stroke 80 ± 1mm

(left or right) (3.14 ± 0.039 in.)

Steer Cylinder Rod Diameter 35 mm(1.37 in.)

1.6 CRITICAL STABILITY WEIGHTS

WARNING
Do not replace items critical to stability, such as batteries or solid tires, with items of
different weight or specification. Do not modify unit in any way to affect stability.

COMPONENT ES1330L ES1530L


Wheel and Tire Assembly (each) 14.1 lb (6.4 kg)

Wheel/Tire and Drive Assembly(each) 47.2 lb (21.4 kg)

Batteries (each) 66.1 lb (30 kg)

Batteries (Combined) 132.3 lb (60 kg)

Counterweight
Japan: 0 0

All Other Markets: 0341.7 lb (155 kg) 0176.4 lb (80 kg)

1.7 MAJOR COMPONENT WEIGHTS

ES1330L ES1530L
ANSI/CSA/CE/UKCA/AUS/GB/
COMPONENT ANSI/CSA/CE/UKCA/AUS/GB/ CHN/KOR JPN
CHN/KOR
Platform with Rails/Extension 273.3 lb(124 kg) 273.3 lb(124 kg) 264.5 lb(120 kg)

Arm Assembly - (Includes Lift


421 lb(191 kg) 520 lb(236 kg)
Cylinder)

Chassis w/ Wheel/Tire/ Steering/PHP


1300 lb(590 kg) 1144 lb(519 kg) 952.3 lb(432 kg)
and Drive Assembly

1.8 TORQUE REQUIREMENTS

Self locking fasteners, such as nylon insert and thread deforming locknuts, are not intended to be reinstalled after removal. Always use
new replacement hardware when installing locking fasteners.

Note: When maintenance becomes necessary or a fastener has loosened, refer to the Torque Charts, page 22 to determine proper
torque value.

20 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

1.9 SERIAL NUMBER LOCATION

For machine identification, a serial number plate is affixed to the machine.

Figure 2. Serial Number Plate Location

1.10 THREADLOCKING COMPOUND

JLG PN Loctite® ND Industries Description


0100011 242™ Vibra-TITE™ 121 Medium Strength (Blue)
1001095650 243™ Vibra-TITE™ 122 Medium Strength (Blue)
0100019 271™ Vibra-TITE™ 140 High Strength (Red)
0100071 262™ Vibra-TITE™ 131 Medium - High Strength (Red)

Note: Loctite® 243™ can be substituted in place of Loctite® 242™. Vibra-TITE™ 122 can be substituted in place of Vibra-TITE™ 121.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 21


Specifications

1.11 TORQUE CHARTS

1.11.1 SAE Fastener Torque Chart

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)


SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS & GRADE 2 NUTS
Torque Torque
Tensile
Clamp Torque (Dry) Torque Lubricated (Loctite® 242™ or
Size TPI Bolt Dia Stress (Loctite® 262™or
Load 271™ or Vibra-TITE™
Area Vibra-TITE™ 111)
111 or 140)

In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]


4 40 0.1120 0.00604 380 8 0.9 6 0.7
48 0.1120 0.00661 420 9 1.0 7 0.8
6 32 0.1380 0.00909 580 16 1.8 12 1.4
40 0.1380 0.01015 610 18 2.0 13 1.5
8 32 0.1640 0.01400 900 30 3.4 22 2.5
36 0.1640 0.01474 940 31 3.5 23 2.6
10 24 0.1900 0.01750 1120 43 4.8 32 3.5
32 0.1900 0.02000 1285 49 5.5 36 4
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2020 96 10.8 75 9 105 12
28 0.2500 0.0364 2320 120 13.5 86 10 135 15
5000059K

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)


SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS & GRADE 2 NUTS
Torque Torque
Tensile
Clamp Torque (Dry) Torque Lubricated (Loctite® 242™ or
Size TPI Bolt Dia Stress (Loctite® 262™or
Load 271™ or Vibra-TITE™
Area Vibra-TITE™ 111)
111 or 140)

In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]


5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 3340 17 23 13 18 19 26 16 22
24 0.3125 0.0580 3700 19 26 14 19 21 29 17 23
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 4940 30 41 23 31 35 48 28 38
24 0.3750 0.0878 5600 35 47 25 34 40 54 32 43
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 6800 50 68 35 47 55 75 45 61
20 0.4375 0.1187 7550 55 75 40 54 60 82 50 68
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 9050 75 102 55 75 85 116 68 92
20 0.5000 0.1599 10700 90 122 65 88 100 136 80 108
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 11600 110 149 80 108 120 163 98 133
18 0.5625 0.2030 12950 120 163 90 122 135 184 109 148
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 14400 150 203 110 149 165 224 135 183
18 0.6250 0.2560 16300 170 230 130 176 190 258 153 207

22 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)


SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS & GRADE 2 NUTS
Torque Torque
Tensile
Clamp Torque (Dry) Torque Lubricated (Loctite® 242™ or
Size TPI Bolt Dia Stress (Loctite® 262™or
Load 271™ or Vibra-TITE™
Area Vibra-TITE™ 111)
111 or 140)

In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]


3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 21300 260 353 200 271 285 388 240 325
16 0.7500 0.3730 23800 300 407 220 298 330 449 268 363
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 29400 430 583 320 434 475 646 386 523
14 0.8750 0.5090 32400 470 637 350 475 520 707 425 576
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 38600 640 868 480 651 675 918 579 785
12 1.0000 0.6630 42200 700 949 530 719 735 1000 633 858
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 42300 800 1085 600 813 840 1142 714 968
12 1.1250 0.8560 47500 880 1193 660 895 925 1258 802 1087
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 53800 1120 1518 840 1139 1175 1598 1009 1368
12 1.2500 1.0730 59600 1240 1681 920 1247 1300 1768 1118 1516
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 64100 1460 1979 1100 1491 1525 2074 1322 1792
12 1.3750 1.3150 73000 1680 2278 1260 1708 1750 2380 1506 2042
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 78000 1940 2630 1460 1979 2025 2754 1755 2379
12 1.5000 1.5800 87700 2200 2983 1640 2224 2300 3128 1974 2676
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. * Assembly uses hardened washer.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 23


Specifications

SAE Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)


SAE GRADE 8 (HEX HD) BOLTS & GRADE 8 NUTS*
Torque Torque Torque
Tensile Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ orVibra- (Loctite® 262™orVibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia (Dry or Loctite® 263)
Stress Area Load TITE™ 111 or 140) TITE™ 131)
K=0.20 K=0.18 K=0.15
In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]
4 40 0.1120 0.00604
48 0.1120 0.00661
6 32 0.1380 0.00909
40 0.1380 0.01015
8 32 0.1640 0.01400
36 0.1640 0.01474 1320 43 5
10 24 0.1900 0.01750 1580 60 7
32 0.1900 0.02000 1800 68 8
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2860 143 16 129 15
28 0.2500 0.0364 3280 164 19 148 17
5000059K

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)


SAE GRADE 8 (HEX HD) BOLTS & GRADE 8 NUTS*
Torque Torque Torque
Tensile Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ orVibra- (Loctite® 262™orVibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia (Dry or Loctite® 263)
Stress Area Load TITE™ 111 or 140) TITE™ 131)
K=0.20 K=0.18 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 4720 25 35 20 25 20 25
24 0.3125 0.0580 5220 25 35 25 35 20 25
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 7000 45 60 40 55 35 50
24 0.3750 0.0878 7900 50 70 45 60 35 50
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 9550 70 95 65 90 50 70
20 0.4375 0.1187 10700 80 110 70 95 60 80
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 12750 105 145 95 130 80 110
20 0.5000 0.1599 14400 120 165 110 150 90 120
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 16400 155 210 140 190 115 155
18 0.5625 0.2030 18250 170 230 155 210 130 175
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 20350 210 285 190 260 160 220
18 0.6250 0.2560 23000 240 325 215 290 180 245
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 30100 375 510 340 460 280 380

24 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)


SAE GRADE 8 (HEX HD) BOLTS & GRADE 8 NUTS*
Torque Torque Torque
Tensile Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ orVibra- (Loctite® 262™orVibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia (Dry or Loctite® 263)
Stress Area Load TITE™ 111 or 140) TITE™ 131)
K=0.20 K=0.18 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
16 0.7500 0.3730 33600 420 570 380 515 315 430
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 41600 605 825 545 740 455 620
14 0.8750 0.5090 45800 670 910 600 815 500 680
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 51500 860 1170 770 1045 645 875
12 1.0000 0.6630 59700 995 1355 895 1215 745 1015
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 68700 1290 1755 1160 1580 965 1310
12 1.1250 0.8560 77000 1445 1965 1300 1770 1085 1475
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 87200 1815 2470 1635 2225 1365 1855
12 1.2500 1.0730 96600 2015 2740 1810 2460 1510 2055
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 104000 2385 3245 2145 2915 1785 2430
12 1.3750 1.3150 118100 2705 3680 2435 3310 2030 2760
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 126500 3165 4305 2845 3870 2370 3225
12 1.5000 1.5800 142200 3555 4835 3200 4350 2665 3625
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. * Assembly uses hardened washer.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 25


Specifications

SAE Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS & GRADE 2 NUTS
Torque Torque
(Loctite® 242™ or 271™
Tensile Clamp Torque (Dry) (Loctite® 262™or Vibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia orVibra-TITE™ 111 or
Stress Area Load K=0.17 TITE™ 131)
140)
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]
4 40 0.1120 0.00604 380 7 0.8
48 0.1120 0.00661 420 8 0.9
6 32 0.1380 0.00909 580 14 1.5
40 0.1380 0.01015 610 14 1.6
8 32 0.1640 0.01400 900 25 2.8
36 0.1640 0.01474 940 26 2.9
10 24 0.1900 0.01750 1120 36 4.1
32 0.1900 0.02000 1285 42 4.7
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2020 86 9.7 80 9
28 0.2500 0.0364 2320 99 11.1 95 11
5000059K

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS & GRADE 2 NUTS
Torque Torque
(Loctite® 242™ or 271™
Tensile Clamp Torque (Dry) (Loctite® 262™or Vibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia orVibra-TITE™ 111 or
Stress Area Load K=0.17 TITE™ 131)
140)
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 3340 15 20 14 19 15 20
24 0.3125 0.0580 3700 15 20 15 21 15 20
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 4940 25 35 25 34 25 34
24 0.3750 0.0878 5600 30 40 28 38 25 34
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 6800 40 55 40 54 35 48
20 0.4375 0.1187 7550 45 60 44 60 40 54
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 9050 65 90 60 82 55 75
20 0.5000 0.1599 10700 75 100 71 97 65 88
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 11600 90 120 87 118 80 109
18 0.5625 0.2030 12950 105 145 97 132 90 122
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 14400 130 175 120 163 115 156
18 0.6250 0.2560 16300 145 195 136 185 125 170

26 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SAE GRADE 5 BOLTS & GRADE 2 NUTS
Torque Torque
(Loctite® 242™ or 271™
Tensile Clamp Torque (Dry) (Loctite® 262™or Vibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia orVibra-TITE™ 111 or
Stress Area Load K=0.17 TITE™ 131)
140)
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 21300 225 305 213 290 200 272
16 0.7500 0.3730 23800 255 345 238 324 225 306
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 29400 365 495 343 466 320 435
14 0.8750 0.5090 32400 400 545 378 514 355 483
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 38600 545 740 515 700 480 653
12 1.0000 0.6630 42200 600 815 563 765 530 721
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 42300 675 920 635 863 595 809
12 1.1250 0.8560 47500 755 1025 713 969 670 911
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 53800 955 1300 897 1219 840 1142
12 1.2500 1.0730 59600 1055 1435 993 1351 930 1265
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 64100 1250 1700 1175 1598 1100 1496
12 1.3750 1.3150 73000 1420 1930 1338 1820 1255 1707
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 78000 1660 2260 1560 2122 1465 1992
12 1.5000 1.5800 87700 1865 2535 1754 2385 1645 2237
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 27


Specifications

SAE Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)

SAE GRADE 8 (HEX HD) BOLTS & GRADE 8 NUTS*


Torque Torque Torque
Tensile Clamp (Dry or Loctite® 263) (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia
Stress Area Load K=0.17 orVibra-TITE™111 or 140) TITE™ 131)
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]
4 40 0.1120 0.00604
48 0.1120 0.00661
6 32 0.1380 0.00909
40 0.1380 0.01015
8 32 0.1640 0.01400
36 0.1640 0.01474 1320 37 4
10 24 0.1900 0.01750 1580 51 6
32 0.1900 0.02000 1800 58 7
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2860 122 14 114 13
28 0.2500 0.0364 3280 139 16 131 15
5000059K

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SAE GRADE 8 (HEX HD) BOLTS & GRADE 8 NUTS*
Torque Torque Torque
Tensile Clamp (Dry or Loctite® 263) (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia
Stress Area Load K=0.17 orVibra-TITE™111 or 140) TITE™ 131)
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 4720 20 25 20 25 20 25
24 0.3125 0.0580 5220 25 35 20 25 20 25
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 7000 35 50 35 50 35 50
24 0.3750 0.0878 7900 40 55 40 55 35 50
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 9550 60 80 55 75 50 70
20 0.4375 0.1187 10700 65 90 60 80 60 80
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 12750 90 120 85 115 80 110
20 0.5000 0.1599 14400 100 135 95 130 90 120
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 16400 130 175 125 170 115 155
18 0.5625 0.2030 18250 145 195 135 185 130 175
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 20350 180 245 170 230 160 220
18 0.6250 0.2560 23000 205 280 190 260 180 245
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 30100 320 435 300 410 280 380

28 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SAE GRADE 8 (HEX HD) BOLTS & GRADE 8 NUTS*
Torque Torque Torque
Tensile Clamp (Dry or Loctite® 263) (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Size TPI Bolt Dia
Stress Area Load K=0.17 orVibra-TITE™111 or 140) TITE™ 131)
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
16 0.7500 0.3730 33600 355 485 335 455 315 430
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 41600 515 700 485 660 455 620
14 0.8750 0.5090 45800 570 775 535 730 500 680
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 51500 730 995 685 930 645 875
12 1.0000 0.6630 59700 845 1150 795 1080 745 1015
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 68700 1095 1490 1030 1400 965 1310
12 1.1250 0.8560 77000 1225 1665 1155 1570 1085 1475
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 87200 1545 2100 1455 1980 1365 1855
12 1.2500 1.0730 96600 1710 2325 1610 2190 1510 2055
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 104000 2025 2755 1905 2590 1785 2430
12 1.3750 1.3150 118100 2300 3130 2165 2945 2030 2760
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 126500 2690 3660 2530 3440 2370 3225
12 1.5000 1.5800 142200 3020 4105 2845 3870 2665 3625
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 29


Specifications

SAE Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS
Torque Torque
Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Tensile Torque (Dry)
Size TPI Bolt Dia Load See orVibra-TITE™ 111 or 140) or TITE™ 131)
Stress Area K=0.17
Note 4 Precoat® 85
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]
4 40 0.1120 0.00604
48 0.1120 0.00661
6 32 0.1380 0.00909
40 0.1380 0.01015
8 32 0.1640 0.01400
36 0.1640 0.01474
10 24 0.1900 0.01750
32 0.1900 0.02000
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2860 122 14 114 13
28 0.2500 0.0364 3280 139 16 131 15
5000059K

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS
Torque Torque
Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Tensile Torque (Dry)
Size TPI Bolt Dia Load See orVibra-TITE™ 111 or 140) or TITE™ 131)
Stress Area K=0.17
Note 4 Precoat® 85
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 4720 20 25 20 25 20 25
24 0.3125 0.0580 5220 25 35 20 25 20 25
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 7000 35 50 35 50 35 50
24 0.3750 0.0878 7900 40 55 40 55 35 50
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 9550 60 80 55 75 50 70
20 0.4375 0.1187 10700 65 90 60 80 60 80
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 12750 90 120 85 115 80 110
20 0.5000 0.1599 14400 100 135 95 130 90 120
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 16400 130 175 125 170 115 155
18 0.5625 0.2030 18250 145 195 135 185 130 175
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 20350 180 245 170 230 160 220
18 0.6250 0.2560 23000 205 280 190 260 180 245

30 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Values for Magni Coating Fasteners (Ref 4150701)


SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS
Torque Torque
Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Tensile Torque (Dry)
Size TPI Bolt Dia Load See orVibra-TITE™ 111 or 140) or TITE™ 131)
Stress Area K=0.17
Note 4 Precoat® 85
K=0.16 K=0.15
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 30100 320 435 300 415 280 380
16 0.7500 0.3730 33600 355 485 335 455 315 430
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 41600 515 700 485 660 455 620
14 0.8750 0.5090 45800 570 775 535 730 500 680
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 51500 730 995 685 930 645 875
12 1.0000 0.6630 59700 845 1150 795 1080 745 1015
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 68700 1095 1490 1030 1400 965 1310
12 1.1250 0.8560 77000 1225 1665 1155 1570 1085 1475
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 87200 1545 2100 1455 1980 1365 1855
12 1.2500 1.0730 96600 1710 2325 1610 2190 1510 2055
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 104000 2025 2755 1905 2590 1785 2430
12 1.3750 1.3150 118100 2300 3130 2165 2945 2030 2760
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 126500 2690 3660 2530 3440 2370 3225
12 1.5000 1.5800 142200 3020 4105 2845 3870 2665 3625
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.
4. Clamp load listed for SHCS is same as grade 8 or class 10.9 and does not represent full strength capability of SHCS. If higher load is required, additional testing is
required.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 31


Specifications

SAE Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)*


SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS
Torque Torque
Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™or Vibra-
Tensile Torque (Dry)
Size TPI Bolt Dia Load See orVibra-TITE™ 111 or 140) or TITE™ 131)
Stress Area K=0.17
Note 4 Precoat® 85
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m] IN-LB [N.m]
4 40 0.1120 0.00604
48 0.1120 0.00661
6 32 0.1380 0.00909
40 0.1380 0.01015
8 32 0.1640 0.01400
36 0.1640 0.01474
10 24 0.1900 0.01750
32 0.1900 0.02000
1/4 20 0.2500 0.0318 2860 122 14 114 13
28 0.2500 0.0364 3280 139 16 131 15
5000059K

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)*


SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS
Torque Torque
Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™or Vibra-
Tensile Torque (Dry)
Size TPI Bolt Dia Load See orVibra-TITE™ 111 or 140) or TITE™ 131)
Stress Area K=0.17
Note 4 Precoat® 85
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
5/16 18 0.3125 0.0524 4720 20 25 20 25 20 25
24 0.3125 0.0580 5220 25 35 20 25 20 25
3/8 16 0.3750 0.0775 7000 35 50 35 50 35 50
24 0.3750 0.0878 7900 40 55 40 55 35 50
7/16 14 0.4375 0.1063 9550 60 80 55 75 50 70
20 0.4375 0.1187 10700 65 90 60 80 60 80
1/2 13 0.5000 0.1419 12750 90 120 85 115 80 110
20 0.5000 0.1599 14400 100 135 95 130 90 120
9/16 12 0.5625 0.1820 16400 130 175 125 170 115 155
18 0.5625 0.2030 18250 145 195 135 185 130 175
5/8 11 0.6250 0.2260 20350 180 245 170 230 160 220
18 0.6250 0.2560 23000 205 280 190 260 180 245

32 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)*


SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS
Torque Torque
Clamp (Loctite® 242™ or 271™ (Loctite® 262™or Vibra-
Tensile Torque (Dry)
Size TPI Bolt Dia Load See orVibra-TITE™ 111 or 140) or TITE™ 131)
Stress Area K=0.17
Note 4 Precoat® 85
K=0.16 K=0.15
In Sq In LB FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m] FT-LB [N.m]
3/4 10 0.7500 0.3340 30100 320 435 300 415 280 380
16 0.7500 0.3730 33600 355 485 335 455 315 430
7/8 9 0.8750 0.4620 41600 515 700 485 660 455 620
14 0.8750 0.5090 45800 570 775 535 730 500 680
1 8 1.0000 0.6060 51500 730 995 685 930 645 875
12 1.0000 0.6630 59700 845 1150 795 1080 745 1015
1 1/8 7 1.1250 0.7630 68700 1095 1490 1030 1400 965 1310
12 1.1250 0.8560 77000 1225 1665 1155 1570 1085 1475
1 1/4 7 1.2500 0.9690 87200 1545 2100 1455 1980 1365 1855
12 1.2500 1.0730 96600 1710 2325 1610 2190 1510 2055
1 3/8 6 1.3750 1.1550 104000 2025 2755 1905 2590 1785 2430
12 1.3750 1.3150 118100 2300 3130 2165 2945 2030 2760
1 1/2 6 1.5000 1.4050 126500 2690 3660 2530 3440 2370 3225
12 1.5000 1.5800 142200 3020 4105 2845 3870 2665 3625
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.
4. Clamp load listed for SHCS is same as grade 8 or class 10.9 and does not represent full strength capability of SHCS. If higher load is required, additional testing is
required.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 33


Specifications

1.11.2 Metric Fastener Torque Chart

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)*


CLASS 8.8 METRIC (HEX/SOCKET HEAD) BOLTS CLASS 8 METRIC NUTS
Torque Torque Torque
Tensile Clamp Load Torque (Lube) (Loctite® 242™or 271™
Size Pitch (Loctite® 262™ or 271™
Stress Area See Note 4 (Dry or Loctite® 263™) or Vibra-TITE™ 111 or
or Vibra-TITE™ 131)
141)
Sq mm KN [N.m] [N.m] [N.m]
3 0.5 5.03 2.19 1.3 1.0 1.2 1.4
3.5 0.6 6.78 2.95 2.1 1.6 1.9 2.3
4 0.7 8.78 3.82 3.1 2.3 2.8 3.4
5 0.8 14.20 6.18 6.2 4.6 5.6 6.8
6 1 20.10 8.74 11 7.9 9.4 12
7 1 28.90 12.6 18 13 16 19
8 1.25 36.60 15.9 26 19 23 28
10 1.5 58.00 25.2 50 38 45 55
12 1.75 84.30 36.7 88 66 79 97
14 2 115 50.0 140 105 126 154
16 2 157 68.3 219 164 197 241
18 2.5 192 83.5 301 226 271 331
20 2.5 245 106.5 426 320 383 469
22 2.5 303 132.0 581 436 523 639
24 3 353 153.5 737 553 663 811
27 3 459 199.5 1080 810 970 1130
30 3.5 561 244.0 1460 1100 1320 1530
33 3.5 694 302.0 1990 1490 1790 2090
36 4 817 355.5 2560 1920 2300 2690
42 4.5 1120 487.0 4090 3070 3680 4290
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.
4. Clamp load listed for SHCS is same as grade 8 or class 10.9 and does not represent full strength capability of SHCS. If higher load is required, additional testing is
required.

34 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Metric Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Zinc Yellow Chromate Fasteners (Ref 4150707)*


CLASS 10.9 METRIC (HEX HEAD) BOLTS,
CLASS 10 METRIC NUTS CLASS 12.9 SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS M3 - M5*
Torque Torque Torque
(Dry or Loctite® 263™) (Lube or Loctite® 242™ or (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Tensile Stress Clamp Load
Size Pitch 271™or Vibra-TITE™ 111 or TITE™ 131)
Area See Note 4
140)
K=0.20 K=0.18 K=0.15
Sq mm KN [N.m] [N.m] [N.m]
3 0.5 5.03 3.13
3.5 0.6 6.78 4.22
4 0.7 8.78 5.47
5 0.8 14.20 8.85
6 1 20.10 12.5
7 1 28.90 18.0 25 23 19
8 1.25 36.60 22.8 37 33 27
10 1.5 58.00 36.1 70 65 55
12 1.75 84.30 52.5 125 115 95
14 2 115 71.6 200 180 150
16 2 157 97.8 315 280 235
18 2.5 192 119.5 430 385 325
20 2.5 245 152.5 610 550 460
22 2.5 303 189.0 830 750 625
24 3 353 222.0 1065 960 800
27 3 459 286.0 1545 1390 1160
30 3.5 561 349.5 2095 1885 1575
33 3.5 694 432.5 2855 2570 2140
36 4 817 509.0 3665 3300 2750
42 4.5 1120 698.0 5865 5275 4395
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.
4. Clamp load listed for SHCS is same as grade 8 or class 10.9 and does not represent full strength capability of SHCS. If higher load is required, additional testing is
required.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 35


Specifications

Metric Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Magni Coated Fasteners (Ref 4150701)*

CLASS 8.8 METRIC (HEX/SOCKET HEAD) BOLTS CLASS 8 METRIC NUTS


Torque Torque Torque
(Dry or Loctite® 263™) (Lube or Loctite® 242™ or (Loctite® 262™ orVibra-
Tensile Stress Clamp Load
Size Pitch 271™ or Vibra-TITE™ 111 or TITE™ 131)
Area See Note 4
140)
K=0.17 K=0.16 K=0.15
Sq mm KN [N.m] [N.m] [N.m]
3 0.5 5.03 2.19 1.1 1.1 1.0
3.5 0.6 6.78 2.95 1.8 1.7 1.5
4 0.7 8.78 3.82 2.6 2.4 2.3
5 0.8 14.20 6.18 5.3 4.9 4.6
6 1 20.10 8.74 9 8.4 7.9
7 1 28.90 12.6 15 14 13
8 1.25 36.60 15.9 22 20 19
10 1.5 58.00 25.2 43 40 38
12 1.75 84.30 36.7 75 70 66
14 2 115 50.0 119 110 105
16 2 157 68.3 186 175 165
18 2.5 192 83.5 256 240 225
20 2.5 245 106.5 362 340 320
22 2.5 303 132.0 494 465 435
24 3 353 153.5 627 590 555
27 3 459 199.5 916 860 810
30 3.5 561 244.0 1245 1170 1100
33 3.5 694 302.0 1694 1595 1495
36 4 817 355.5 2176 2050 1920
42 4.5 1120 487.0 3477 3275 3070
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.
4. Clamp load listed for SHCS is same as grade 8 or class 10.9 and does not represent full strength capability of SHCS. If higher load is required, additional testing is
required.

36 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Specifications

Metric Fastener Torque Chart (Continued)

Values for Magni Coated Fasteners (Ref 4150701)*

CLASS 10.9 METRIC (HEX HEAD) BOLTS CLASS 10 METRIC NUTS,


CLASS 12.9 SOCKET HEAD CAPSCREWS M6 AND ABOVE*
Torque Torque Torque
(Dry or Loctite® 263™) (Lube or Loctite® 242™ or (Loctite® 262™ or Vibra-
Tensile Stress Clamp Load
Size Pitch 271™ or Vibra-TITE™ 111 or TITE™ 131)
Area See Note 4
140)
K=0.17 K=0.18 K=0.15
Sq mm KN [N.m] [N.m] [N.m]
3 0.5 5.03 3.13
3.5 0.6 6.78 4.22
4 0.7 8.78 5.47
5 0.8 14.20 8.85
6 1 20.10 12.5 13 12 11
7 1 28.90 18.0 21 20 19
8 1.25 36.60 22.8 31 29 27
10 1.5 58.00 36.1 61 58 55
12 1.75 84.30 52.5 105 100 95
14 2 115 71.6 170 160 150
16 2 157 97.8 265 250 235
18 2.5 192 119.5 365 345 325
20 2.5 245 152.5 520 490 460
22 2.5 303 189.0 705 665 625
24 3 353 222.0 905 850 800
27 3 459 286.0 1315 1235 1160
30 3.5 561 349.5 1780 1680 1575
33 3.5 694 432.5 2425 2285 2140
36 4 817 509.0 3115 2930 2750
42 4.5 1120 698.0 4985 4690 4395
5000059K
Note: 1. These torque values do not apply to cadmium plated fasteners.
2. All torque values are static torque measured per standard audit methods tolerance = ±10%.
3. *Assembly uses hardened washer.
4. Clamp load listed for SHCS is same as grade 8 or class 10.9 and does not represent full strength capability of SHCS. If higher load is required, additional testing is
required.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 37


This Page is intentionally left blank

38
SECTION 2
GENERAL

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
2.1 MACHINE PREPARATION, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE...................................................................40
2.1.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 40
2.1.2 Preparation, Inspection, and Maintenance............................................................................. 40
2.1.3 Pre-Start Inspection ........................................................................................................... 40
2.1.4 Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Inspection ................................................................... 40
2.1.5 Annual Machine Inspection ................................................................................................. 40
2.1.6 Preventative Maintenance .................................................................................................. 40
2.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE......................................................................41
2.2.1 Maintenance and Inspection Schedule Codes ........................................................................ 41
2.3 SERVICE MAINTENANCE COMPONENTS.................................................................................................45
2.3.1 Scissor Arm - Safety Prop .................................................................................................... 45
2.3.2 Hydraulic Oil Check Procedure............................................................................................. 46
2.4 SERVICE AND GUIDELINES....................................................................................................................47
2.4.1 General ............................................................................................................................ 47
2.4.2 Safety and Workmanship .................................................................................................... 47
2.4.3 Cleanliness ....................................................................................................................... 47
2.4.4 Components Removal and Installation.................................................................................. 47
2.4.5 Component Disassembly and Reassembly............................................................................. 48
2.4.6 Pressure-Fit Parts ............................................................................................................... 48
2.4.7 Bearings ........................................................................................................................... 48
2.4.8 Gaskets ............................................................................................................................ 48
2.4.9 Bolt Usage and Torque Application ...................................................................................... 48
2.4.10 Hydraulic Lines and Electrical Wiring .................................................................................... 48
2.4.11 Hydraulic System ............................................................................................................... 48
2.4.12 Lubrication ....................................................................................................................... 48
2.4.13 Battery ............................................................................................................................. 48
2.5 LUBRICATION AND INFORMATION ........................................................................................................49
2.5.1 Hydraulic System ............................................................................................................... 49
2.5.2 Hydraulic Oil ..................................................................................................................... 49
2.5.3 Changing Hydraulic Oil....................................................................................................... 49
2.5.4 Lubrication Specifications ................................................................................................... 49
2.6 CYLINDER DRIFT TEST ..........................................................................................................................50
2.6.1 Platform Drift .................................................................................................................... 50
2.6.2 Cylinder Drift .................................................................................................................... 50
2.7 PINS AND COMPOSITE BEARING REPAIR GUIDELINES.............................................................................50

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 39


General

2.1 MACHINE PREPARATION, INSPECTION, AND MAINTENANCE

2.1.1 General
This section provides the necessary information needed by those personnel that are responsible to place the machine in operation
readiness and maintain its safe operating condition. For maximum service life and safe operation, ensure that all the necessary
inspections and maintenance have been completed before placing the machine into service. With proper care, maintenance and
inspections performed per JLG's recommendations with any and all discrepancies corrected, this product will be fit for continued use.

2.1.2 Preparation, Inspection, and Maintenance


It is important to establish and conform to a comprehensive inspection and preventive maintenance program. The following table
outlines the periodic machine inspections and maintenance recommended by JLG Industries, Inc. consult your national, regional, or local
regulations for further requirements for mobile elevating work platform (MEWP). The frequency of inspections and maintenance must be
increased as environment, severity and frequency of usage requires.

2.1.3 Pre-Start Inspection


It is the User’s or Operator’s primary responsibility to perform a Pre-Start Inspection of the machine prior to use daily or at each change
of operator. Reference the Operation and Safety Manual for completion procedures for the Pre-Start Inspection. The Operation and
Safety Manual must be read in its entirety and understood prior to performing the Pre-Start Inspection.

2.1.4 Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Inspection


The Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Inspection shall be performed by a qualified JLG equipment mechanic. JLG Industries, Inc.
recognizes a qualified JLG equipment mechanic as a person who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, extensive
knowledge, training, or experience, has successfully demonstrated the ability and proficiency to service, repair, and maintain the subject
JLG product model.
The Pre-Delivery Inspection and Frequent Inspection procedures are performed in the same manner, but at different times. The Pre-
Delivery Inspection shall be performed prior to each sale, lease, or rental delivery. The Frequent Inspection shall be accomplished for
each machine in service for 3 months or 150 hours (whichever comes first); out of service for a period of more than 3 months; or when
purchased used. The frequency of this inspection must be increased as environment, severity and frequency of usage requires.
Reference the JLG Pre-Delivery and Frequent Inspection Form and the Inspection and Preventative Maintenance Schedule for items
requiring inspection during the performance of these inspections. Reference the appropriate areas of this manual for servicing and
maintenance procedures.

2.1.5 Annual Machine Inspection


JLG recommends that the Annual Machine Inspection be performed by a Factory-Trained Service Technician on an annual basis, no later
than thirteen (13) months from the date of the prior Annual Machine Inspection. JLG Industries, Inc. recognizes a Factory-Trained Service
Technician as a person who has successfully completed the JLG Service Training School for the subject JLG product model. Reference the
machine Service and Maintenance Manual and appropriate JLG inspection form for performance of this inspection.
Reference the JLG Annual Machine Inspection Form and the Inspection and Preventative Maintenance Schedule for items requiring
inspection during the performance of this inspection. Reference the appropriate areas of this manual for servicing and maintenance
procedures.
For the purpose of receiving safety-related bulletins, it is important that JLG Industries, Inc. has updated ownership information for each
machine. When performing each Annual Machine Inspection, notify JLG Industries, Inc. of the current machine ownership.

2.1.6 Preventative Maintenance


In conjunction with the specified inspections, maintenance shall be performed by a qualified JLG equipment mechanic. JLG Industries,
Inc. recognizes a qualified JLG equipment mechanic as a person who, by possession of a recognized degree, certificate, extensive
knowledge, training, or experience, has successfully demonstrated the ability and proficiency to service, repair, and maintain the subject
JLG product model.
Reference the Preventative Maintenance Schedule and the appropriate areas of this manual for servicing and maintenance procedures.
The frequency of service and maintenance must be increased as environment, severity and frequency of usage requires.

40 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General

Table 3. Inspection and Maintenance Responsibilities


PRIMARY SERVICE
TYPE FREQUENCY REFERENCE
RESPONSIBILITY QUALIFICATION
Pre-Start
Prior to use each day; or At each Operator change. User or Operator User or Operator Operation and Safety Manual
Inspection
Pre-Delivery Owner, Dealer, or Service and Maintenance Manual
Prior to each sale, lease, or rental delivery. Qualified JLG Mechanic
Inspection User and applicable JLG inspection form.

Frequent In service for 3 months or 150 hours, whichever comes first; or Service and Maintenance Manual
Owner, Dealer, or
Inspection Out of service for a period of more than 3 months; or Purchased Qualified JLG Mechanic and applicable JLG inspection form.
User
used.
Factory-Trained Service
Annual Machine Annually, no later than 13 months from the date of the prior Owner, Dealer, or Service and Maintenance Manual
Technician
Inspection inspection. User and applicable JLG inspection form.
(recommended)
Preventative At intervals as specified in the Ser vice and Maintenance Manual. Owner, Dealer, or
Qualified JLG Mechanic Service and Maintenance Manual
Maintenance User

Note: Inspection forms are available from JLG. Use the Service and Maintenance Manual to perform inspections.

2.2 PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE AND INSPECTION SCHEDULE

The preventive maintenance and inspection checks are listed and defined in the following table. This table is divided into two basic
parts, the “AREA” to be inspected and the “INTERVAL” at which the inspection is to take place. Under the “AREA” portion of the table, the
various systems along with the components that make up that system are listed. The “INTERVAL” portion of the table is divided into two
columns representing the various inspection time periods. The numbers listed within the interval column represent the applicable
inspection code for which that component is to be checked.
The checks and services listed in this schedule are not intended to replace any local or regional regulations that may pertain to this type
of equipment nor should the lists be considered as all inclusive. Variances in interval times may occur due to climate and/or conditions
and depending on the location and use of the machine.

NOTICE
JLG INDUSTRIES requires that a complete annual inspection be performed in
accordance with the “annual machine inspection report” form.

Note: This machine requires periodic safety and maintenance inspections by a qualified JLG mechanic. Notify JLG dealer if inspection is
overdue.

2.2.1 Maintenance and Inspection Schedule Codes


1. Check for proper and secure: installation, adjustment, or torque.

2. Visual inspection for damage: (cracks, corrosion, abrasions, distortion, excessive wear, broken welds, gouges, chafing and threads
showing).

3. Proper operation.

4. Check for proper sealing, signs of leakage and fluid level.

5. Clean and free of debris.

6. Decals installed and legible.

7. Check for proper tolerances, routing, and lubrication.

8. Fully Charged.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 41


General

9. Verify/Perform.

Table 4. Preventive Maintenance and Inspection Schedule


INSPECTIONS
AREA ON MACHINE PRE-DELIVERY (1) OR FREQUENT (2) ANNUAL (3) ( YEARLY) INSPECTION
INSPECTION
Scissor Arms
Scissor arms 1, 2 1, 2
Safety prop 1, 2 1, 2

Nuts, bolts, shafts, shields, bearings and locking devices 1, 2 1, 2

Cylinder/Pivot pins and attaching hardware 1, 2 1, 2

Arm pads and sliding block 1, 2 1, 2

Platform Assembly

Platform 1 1
Gate Assembly and Latch 1, 3 1, 3

Extend deck and Locks 1, 3 1, 3


Guard rails and floor 1, 2 1, 2
Platform roll pins and fold down rails 1, 2 1, 2

Lanyard Anchorage Point 1, 2, 6 1, 2, 6

Chassis Assembly

Wheel bolts 150 150


Tires 1 2
Steer, Drive and axle components 1 2, 5

Side-Compartment Door Installation 1, 3, 5 1, 3, 5

Drive Motors 1 1, 4, 5
Platform Ladder 1, 5 1, 5
Drive Brakes 1 1, 5
Drive Hubs 1 1, 4, 5
Sliding Wear Pads** 1, 2, 5, 7 1, 2, 5, 7

Front Wheel spindle nuts/bolts 150 150

Functions/Controls
Control levers, switches, gauges and instruments 1,3 1,3

Detents properly lock, Control enclosure and protective 1,3 1,3

Emergency stop switches at ground and platform 1,3 1,3

Lift, drive and speed cut-outs 3 3

Manual Descent Control 3 3


Function enable system 3 3

Brakes 3 3,5

42 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General

Table 4. Preventive Maintenance and Inspection Schedule (continued)


INSPECTIONS
AREA ON MACHINE PRE-DELIVERY (1) OR FREQUENT (2) ANNUAL (3) ( YEARLY) INSPECTION
INSPECTION
Machine functions 3 3
Joystick/toggle return to neutral/off when released 1,3 1,3

Load Sensing System 3 3,9

Power System

Batteries 4 4
Batter y Fluid 4 4

Batter y Charger - 3

HYDRAULIC/ELECTRIC SYSTEM
Hydraulic cylinders 1,7 2,4,5

Pumps, oil lines and reservoir 1 4

Hydraulic filter 5 5

Hydraulic tank, cap, breather and vent 1 4

Hydraulic fitting 1 4

Electrical Connections 1, 3 1, 3
Switches, gauges, horn and lights 1, 3 1, 3

Switches and controls 1, 3 1, 3


All hydraulic pressures 3 3

Hydraulic Fluid 8 8

GENERAL
No unauthorized modification or additions 9 9
Paint and overall appearance. 5 5

Operation and safety manual 9 9

General Structural Condition and Welds 2 2


Grease and lubrication specification 9 9

Function test of all system 9 9

Notify JLG change in machine ownership 9

ANSI and AEM handbook 9 9


Capacity Decals 9 9

All decals/placards 9 9

Annual machine inspection 9

Safety publication 9 9

All fasteners, pins, shields and covers 1, 2 1, 2

Footnotes:

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 43


General

Table 4. Preventive Maintenance and Inspection Schedule (continued)


INSPECTIONS
AREA ON MACHINE PRE-DELIVERY (1) OR FREQUENT (2) ANNUAL (3) ( YEARLY) INSPECTION
INSPECTION
(1)Prior to each sale, lease, or delivery.
(2)In service for 3 months; Out of service for 3 months or more; Purchased used.
(3)Annually, no later than 13 months from the date of the prior inspection, Includes all daily and quarterly inspections, mandated by regulating body.
(50)Indicates a 50 hour interval required to perform task after initial use of machine. This only occurs once in machine life.

** Refer to Operators Manual for machine specific instructions.

44 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General

2.3 SERVICE MAINTENANCE COMPONENTS

1. Hydraulic Tank 4. Scissor Arm


2. Pump Assembly 5. Safety Prop

3. Batteries Location
(Some components are hidden for clarity in illustration.)

2.3.1 Scissor Arm - Safety Prop

WARNING
Never work under an elevated platform until it has been restrained from movement
with the safety prop, blocking or overhead sling.

CAUTION
The safety prop must be used whenever maintenance performed on the machine
requires the scissor arms to be raised and only with no load in the platform.

The safety prop is located on the right side of the machine on the side of the arm stack.
To engage the safety prop:

1. From the Ground Control Station, raise the platform enough to allow the safety prop to be engaged.

2. At the right side of the machine, rotate safety prop into the vertical position.

3. Lower the platform until the safety prop stop on the arm set below, stops all downward movement of the platform/arm assembly.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 45


General

To disengage the safety prop:

1. Raise the platform enough to release the safety prop.

2. Rotate the prop assembly counterclockwise until it is resting on the arm prop holder plate on the side of the scissor arm assembly.

2.3.2 Hydraulic Oil Check Procedure


• Lube Point(s) - Hydraulic Reservoir

• Reservoir Capacity - 1.3 Gal. (5 L)

• Lube - Hydraulic Oil

• Interval - Check Daily

Note: Check the hydraulic oil level with the platform in the stowed position only. Be certain the hydraulic oil has warmed to operating
temperature before checking the oil level in the reservoir.

1. Open the hydraulic compartment door on the right side of the machine and locate the hydraulic reservoir (1).

2. Locate the lines indicating the minimum and maximum levels of hydraulic oil (2 and 3) in the reservoir. Ensure the level of oil is
between the two lines.

3. If the level of oil in the reservoir is below the minimum level (2), more oil is needed. Wipe all dirt and debris from the filler cap (4)
and surrounding area.

4. Remove filler cap and add proper grade of oil. Fill until oil level is close to the maximum level (3). Do not overfill.

Note: Take precautions so impurities (dirt, water, etc.) cannot enter the hydraulic system while filter/filter cap is removed.

Note: Recommended lubricating intervals are based on machine operations under normal conditions. For machines used in multi-shift
operations and/or exposed to hostile environments or conditions, lubrication frequencies must be increased accordingly.

46 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General

1. Hydraulic Reservoir 3. Maximum Level

2. Minimum Level 4. Filler Cap

2.4 SERVICE AND GUIDELINES

2.4.1 General
The following information is provided to assist you in the use and application of servicing and maintenance procedures contained in this
book.

2.4.2 Safety and Workmanship


Your safety, and that of others, is the first consideration when engaging in the maintenance of equipment. Always be conscious of
weight. Never attempt to move heavy parts without the aid of a mechanical device. Do not allow heavy objects to rest in an unstable
position. When raising a portion of the equipment, ensure that adequate support is provided.

2.4.3 Cleanliness
1. The most important single item in preserving the long service life of a machine is to keep dirt and foreign materials out of the vital
components. Precautions have been taken to safeguard against this. Shields, covers, seals, and filters are provided to keep air, fuel,
and oil supplies clean; however, these items must be maintained on a scheduled basis in order to function properly.

2. At any time when air, fuel, or oil lines are disconnected, clean adjacent areas as well as the openings and fittings themselves. As
soon as a line or component is disconnected, cap or cover all openings to prevent entry of foreign matter.

3. Clean and inspect all parts during servicing or maintenance, and assure that all passages and openings are unobstructed. Cover all
parts to keep them clean. Be sure all parts are clean before they are installed. New parts should remain in their containers until
they are ready to be used.

2.4.4 Components Removal and Installation


1. Use adjustable lifting devices, whenever possible, if mechanical assistance is required. All slings (chains, cables, etc.) should be
parallel to each other and as near perpendicular as possible to top of part being lifted.

2. Should it be necessary to remove a component on an angle, keep in mind that the capacity of an eyebolt or similar bracket
lessens, as the angle between the supporting structure and the component becomes less than 90°.

3. If a part resists removal, check to see whether all nuts, bolts, cables, brackets, wiring, etc., have been removed and that no adjacent
parts are interfering.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 47


General

2.4.5 Component Disassembly and Reassembly


When disassembling or reassembling a component, complete the procedural steps in sequence. Do not partially disassemble or
assemble one part, then start on another. Always recheck your work to assure that nothing has been overlooked. Do not make any
adjustments, other than those recommended, without obtaining proper approval.

2.4.6 Pressure-Fit Parts


When assembling pressure-fit parts, use an anti-seize or molybdenum disulfide base compound to lubricate the mating surface.

2.4.7 Bearings
1. When a bearing is removed, cover it to keep out dirt and abrasives. Clean bearings in nonflammable cleaning solvent and allow to
drip dry. Compressed air can be used but do not spin the bearing.

2. Discard bearings if the races and balls (or rollers) are pitted, scored, or burned.

3. If bearing is found to be serviceable, apply a light coat of oil and wrap it in clean (waxed) paper. Do not unwrap reusable or new
bearings until they are ready to install.

4. Lubricate new or used serviceable bearings before installation. When pressing a bearing into a retainer or bore, apply pressure to
the outer race. If the bearing is to be installed on a shaft, apply pressure to the inner race.

2.4.8 Gaskets
Check that holes in gaskets align with openings in the mating parts. If it becomes necessary to hand-fabricate a gasket, use gasket
material or stock of equivalent material and thickness. Be sure to cut holes in the right location, as blank gaskets can cause serious
system damage.

2.4.9 Bolt Usage and Torque Application


1. Self locking fasteners, such as nylon insert and thread deforming locknuts, are not intended to be reinstalled after removal. Always
use new replacement hardware when installing locking fasteners.

2. Use bolts of proper length. A bolt which is too long will bottom before the head is tight against its related part. If a bolt is too
short, there will not be enough thread area to engage and hold the part properly. When replacing bolts, use only those having the
same specifications of the original, or one which is equivalent.

3. Unless specific torque requirements are given within the text, standard torque values should be used on heat-treated bolts, studs,
and steel nuts, in accordance with recommended shop practices. (Refer to Torque Charts, page 22.)

2.4.10 Hydraulic Lines and Electrical Wiring


Clearly mark or tag hydraulic lines and electrical wiring, as well as their receptacles, when disconnecting or removing them from the unit.
This will assure that they are correctly reinstalled.

2.4.11 Hydraulic System


1. Keep the system clean. If evidence of metal or rubber particles are found in the hydraulic system, drain and flush the entire system.

2. Disassemble and reassemble parts on a clean work surface. Clean all metal parts with nonflammable cleaning solvent. Lubricate
components, as required, to aid assembly.

2.4.12 Lubrication
Service applicable components with the amount, type, and grade of lubricant recommended in this manual, at the specified intervals.
When recommended lubricants are not available, consult your local supplier for an equivalent that meets or exceeds the specifications
listed.

2.4.13 Battery
Clean battery, using a non-metallic brush and a solution of baking soda and water. Rinse with clean water. After cleaning, thoroughly dry
battery and coat terminals with an anti corrosion compound.

48 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General

2.5 LUBRICATION AND INFORMATION

2.5.1 Hydraulic System


1. The primary enemy of a hydraulic system is contamination. Contaminants enter the system by various means, e. g., using
inadequate hydraulic oil, allowing moisture, grease, filings, sealing components, sand, etc., to enter when performing
maintenance, or by permitting the pump to cavitate due to insufficient quantity of oil in supply tube.

2. The design and manufacturing tolerances of the component working parts are very close, therefore, even the smallest amount of
dirt or foreign matter entering a system can cause wear or damage to the components and generally results in faulty operation.
Every precaution must be taken to keep hydraulic oil clean, including reserve oil in storage. Hydraulic system filters should be
checked, cleaned, and/or replaced as necessary, at the specified intervals required, refer to Table - Preventive Maintenance and
Inspection Schedule, page 42 Always examine filters for evidence of metal particles.

3. Cloudy oils indicate a high moisture content which permits organic growth, resulting in oxidation or corrosion. If this condition
occurs, the system must be drained, flushed, and refilled with clean oil.

4. It is not advisable to mix oils of different brands or types, as they may not contain the same required additives or be of comparable
viscosities. Good grade mineral oils, with viscosities suited to the ambient temperatures in which the machine is operating, are
recommended for use.

Note: Metal particles may appear in the oil or filters of new machines due to the wear-in of meshing components.

2.5.2 Hydraulic Oil


1. Refer to Section — Lubrication, page 17 for recommendations for viscosity ranges.

2. JLG recommends Premium Hydraulic Fluid, which has an ISO viscosity grade of 15 and a viscosity index of 168.

Note: Start-up of hydraulic system with oil temperatures below -15°F (-26°C) is not recommended. If it is necessary to start the system
in a sub-zero environment, it will be necessary to heat the oil with a low density, electrical heater to a minimum temperature of
-15°F (-26°C).

2.5.3 Changing Hydraulic Oil


1. Use of any of the recommended crankcase or hydraulic oils eliminates the need for changing the oil on a regular basis. However,
filter elements must be changed annually unless operating in extreme conditions. If it is necessary to change the oil, use only
those oils meeting or exceeding the specifications appearing in this manual. If unable to obtain the same type of oil supplied with
the machine, consult local supplier for assistance in selecting the proper equivalent. Avoid mixing petroleum and synthetic base
oils. JLG Industries recommends changing the hydraulic oil annually.

2. Use every precaution to keep the hydraulic oil clean. If the oil must be poured from the original container into another, be sure to
clean all possible contaminants from the service container. Always replace the filter and clean magnet any time the system oil is
changed.

3. While the unit is shut down, a good preventive maintenance measure is to make a thorough inspection of all hydraulic
components, lines, fittings, etc., as well as a functional check of each system, before placing the machine back in service.

Note: Refer to Section —Hydraulic Oil Check Procedure, page 46 for oil checking and oil changing procedure.

2.5.4 Lubrication Specifications


Specified lubricants, as recommended by the component manufacturers, are always the best choice, however, multi-purpose greases
usually have the qualities which meet a variety of single purpose grease requirements. Should any question arise, regarding the use of
greases in maintenance stock, consult your local supplier for evaluation. Refer to Section - Lubrication Specifications, page 17 for an
explanation of the lubricant key designations.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 49


General

2.6 CYLINDER DRIFT TEST

Maximum acceptable cylinder drift is to be measured using the following methods.

2.6.1 Platform Drift


Measure the drift of the platform to the ground. Fully elevate the platform. Maximum allowable drift is 2 in. (5 cm) in 10 minutes. If the
machine does not pass this test, proceed with the following.

2.6.2 Cylinder Drift

CYLINDER BORE DIAMETER MAX. ACCEPTABLE DRIFT IN 10 MINUTES


INCHES MM INCHES MM
2.4 60 0.042 1.06
3 76.2 0.026 0.66
3.5 89 0.019 0.48
4 101.6 0.015 0.38
5 127 0.009 0.22
6 152.4 0.006 0.15
7 177.8 0.005 0.13

Drift is to be measured at the cylinder rod with a calibrated dial indicator. The cylinder oil must be at ambient temperature and
temperature stabilized.
The cylinder must have the normal load, which is the normal platform load applied.
If the cylinder passes this test, it is acceptable.

Note: This information is based on 6 drops per minute cylinder leakage.

2.7 PINS AND COMPOSITE BEARING REPAIR GUIDELINES

Filament wound bearings.

1. Pinned joints should be disassembled and inspected if the following occurs:


a. Excessive sloppiness in joints.
b. Noise originating from the joint during operation.

2. Filament wound bearings should be replaced if any of the following is observed:


a. Frayed or separated fibers on the liner surface.
b. Cracked or damaged liner backing.
c. Bearings that have moved or spun in their housing.
d. Debris embedded in liner surface.

3. Pins should be replaced if any of the following is observed (pin should be properly cleaned prior to inspection):
a. Detectable wear in the bearing area.
b. Flaking, pealing, scoring, or scratches on the pin surface.
c. Rusting of the pin in the bearing area.

50 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General

4. Re-assembly of pinned joints using filament wound bearings.


a. Housing should be blown out to remove all dirt and debris, bearings and bearing housings must be free of all contamination.
b. Bearing / pins should be cleaned with a solvent to remove all grease and oil.

Note: Filament wound bearings are dry joints and should not be lubricated.

c. Pins should be inspected to ensure it is free of burrs, nicks, and scratches which would damage the bearing during installation
and operation.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 51


This Page is intentionally left blank

52
SECTION 3
CHASSIS AND SCISSOR ARMS

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
3.1 BATTERIES AND HYDRAULIC COMPONENT COMPARTMENTS .................................................................55
3.2 BATTERY REMOVAL/MAINTENANCE ......................................................................................................56
3.2.1 Battery Quick-Disconnect.................................................................................................... 57
3.2.2 Battery Maintenance and Safety Practices ............................................................................. 58
3.3 BATTERY CHARGING ............................................................................................................................59
3.3.1 Delta-Q - Battery Charger.................................................................................................... 59
3.3.2 Green Power - Battery Charger ............................................................................................ 60
3.3.3 CAN - Battery Charger ........................................................................................................ 60
3.3.4 Battery Charger Maintenance .............................................................................................. 61
3.4 LOGIC CONTROL MODULE INSTALLATION .............................................................................................63
3.4.1 Module Access .................................................................................................................. 63
3.4.2 To Remove the Module from the Machine............................................................................. 63
3.5 MAIN POWER CONTACTOR RELAY AND DRIVE CONTROL MODULE .........................................................65
3.6 DRIVE CONTROL MODULE ....................................................................................................................66
3.6.1 Removal ........................................................................................................................... 66
3.6.2 Installation........................................................................................................................ 66
3.7 DRIVE MODULE ELECTRICAL EVALUATION ............................................................................................68
3.8 TRACTION SYSTEM...............................................................................................................................69
3.8.1 Theory of Operation........................................................................................................... 69
3.8.2 Common Traction System Difficulties ................................................................................... 69
3.9 DRIVE MOTOR ELECTRICAL EVALUATION ..............................................................................................70
3.10 TORQUE HUB.......................................................................................................................................71
3.10.1 Roll Test ........................................................................................................................... 71
3.10.2 Leak Test .......................................................................................................................... 71
3.10.3 Oil Check/Fill Procedure...................................................................................................... 72
3.10.4 Drive Motor Removal ......................................................................................................... 72
3.10.5 Primary Planet Carrier Disassembly ...................................................................................... 73
3.10.6 Spindle Carrier Disassembly ................................................................................................ 74
3.10.7 Primary Planet Carrier Assembly .......................................................................................... 74
3.10.8 Spindle Carrier Assembly .................................................................................................... 75
3.10.9 Motor and Brake Assembly.................................................................................................. 75
3.11 DRIVE HUB ..........................................................................................................................................76
3.12 DRIVE MOTOR CABLE ROUTING ............................................................................................................77
3.13 GROUND CONTROL STATION................................................................................................................79
3.13.1 Components Location ........................................................................................................ 79

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 53


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.13.2 Removal ........................................................................................................................... 79


3.13.3 Installation........................................................................................................................ 79
3.14 PLATFORM CONTROL STATION.............................................................................................................81
3.14.1 Overview of Control Station Components ............................................................................. 81
3.14.2 Installation/Removal .......................................................................................................... 82
3.14.3 Control Station Disassembly................................................................................................ 83
3.14.4 Joystick Controller ............................................................................................................. 84
3.15 TILT SENSOR INSTALLATION.................................................................................................................86
3.15.1 Tilt Sensor Removal............................................................................................................ 86
3.15.2 Tilt Sensor Installation ........................................................................................................ 86
3.16 SCISSOR ARM - ROTARY ANGLE SENSOR ...............................................................................................87
3.16.1 Rotary Angle Sensor Installation .......................................................................................... 87
3.17 POTHOLE PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS .....................................................................................89
3.18 STEER AND SPINDLE ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS .....................................................................................91
3.18.1 Drive Motor Covers Installation............................................................................................ 92
3.18.2 Tire Wear and Damage ....................................................................................................... 92
3.18.3 Wheel and Tire Replacement ............................................................................................... 92
3.18.4 Wheel Installation .............................................................................................................. 93
3.19 ARMS AND PLATFORM POSITIONING AND SUPPORT .............................................................................93
3.20 PLATFORM REMOVAL ..........................................................................................................................94
3.21 SCISSOR ARMS REMOVAL.....................................................................................................................94
3.21.1 Removing Scissor Arm Assembly as a Complete Unit .............................................................. 94
3.21.2 Removing/installing Scissor Arms Individually........................................................................ 95

54 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.1 BATTERIES AND HYDRAULIC COMPONENT COMPARTMENTS

Figure 3. Components of Battery Side Swing - Out Compartment Doors

1. Left Side Component Compartment Door 2. Compartment Latch and Release Handle 3. Batteries

SC100012A

Figure 4. Side Swing - Out Compartment Doors

1. Right Side Component Compartment Door 3. Hydraulic Tank

2. Compartment Latch and Release Handle 4. Motor Assembly

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 55


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 5. Side Swing - Out Compartment Doors

1. Side Compartment Door 5. Support Latch 9. Bracket 13. Cotter Pin


2. Pin Latch 6. Bolt 10. Bolt* 14. Bearing
3. Cotter Pin 7. Washer 11. Washer
4. Thrust Washer, spring 8. Nut 12. Screw

Note: * Torque hinge tightening bolts to 37 ft. lbs. (50 Nm).

3.2 BATTERY REMOVAL/MAINTENANCE

NOTICE
JLG machines equipped with delta q battery chargers are designed for the best
performance with oem factory approved batteries.
Approved JLG replacement batteries are available through JLG's aftermarket parts
distribution centers or JLG's aftermarket programs. For assistance with proper
battery replacement, please contact your local JLG support office. Batteries
approved by JLG have been tested for compatibility with the algorithm
programming of the delta q battery charger to optimize battery life and machine
cycle times. The use of non approved batteries in your JLG equipment may result in
performance issues or battery charger fault codes. JLG assumes no responsibility for
service or performance issues arising from the use of non approved batteries.

56 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.2.1 Battery Quick-Disconnect


Machines equipped with the battery quick-disconnect allow all machine power to be easily disconnected at the batteries without
removing battery cables from the battery posts. To disconnect power, locate the RED quick-disconnect connector on top of the batteries
inside the battery compartment and pull halves apart.

CAUTION
Before battery removal can begin, ensure that the (+) and (–) battery cables have
been properly disconnected

1. The machine batteries are located inside the machine left side compartment door. Release the latch bar at the rear of the door and
swing door open.

2. Once the battery door is open, battery replacement/ maintenance can begin.

3. To remove one or more batteries from the machine, first disconnect the positive (+) battery cable from the forward most battery
connected to the main contactor relay.

4. After any maintenance on the batteries or replacement of the batteries is complete, reconnect the batteries and check for proper
operation.

5. Close and latch the left side compartment door.

Figure 6. Battery Cable Connections

1. Batteries 3. Battery Quick Disconnect


2. Battery Fuse

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 57


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.2.2 Battery Maintenance and Safety Practices


Non-Sealed - Refillable Lead Acid Batteries Only

CAUTION
Ensure that battery acid does not come into contact with skin or clothing. Wear
protective clothing and eyewear when working with batteries. Neutralize any
battery acid spills with baking soda and water.
Battery acid releases an explosive gas while charging, allow no open flames, sparks
or lighted tobacco products in the area while charging batteries. Charge batteries
only in a well ventilated area.
Add only distilled water to batteries. When adding distilled water to the batteries, a
non-metallic container and/or funnel must be used.

WARNING
Do not replace items critical to stability, such as batteries, with items of different
weight or specification. Do not modify unit in any way to affect stability.

Check the electrolyte level of the batteries often, adding only distilled water when required. When fully charged, battery fluid level
should be 1/8 in. below vent tubes. (Refer to below Figure).

• DO NOT fill to bottom of vent tubes.

• DO NOT allow fluid level to go below the top of the plates when charging or operating.

• Clean terminal connections if they become corroded.

58 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.3 BATTERY CHARGING

Note: Be sure that machine is parked in a well ventilated area before charging begins.

CAUTION
Only plug the charger into a properly installed and grounded outlet. Do not use
ground adaptors or modify plug. Do not touch non-insulated portion of output
connector or non-insulated battery terminal.
Do not operate charger if the ac supply cord is damaged or if the charger has
received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way.
Always disconnect the charger ac supply before making or breaking the (pos/neg)
connections to the battery. Do not open or disassemble charger.

1. The battery charger AC input plug is located in an opening on the panel at the lower rear of the machine.

2. Connect the charger AC input plug to a grounded outlet using a 3 wire heavy duty extension cord. (Refer to Section - Battery
Charger, page 15 for battery charger AC input specifications.)

3. When powered up the charger will go through a short LED indicator self-test. The battery charger LED indicators on the charger
will flash in sequence for two seconds. These LED indicators can be viewed through the opening on the rear panel where the
charger AC cord is accessed. See battery charger descriptions following in this sub-section.

4. The batteries are fully charged when the green light on the battery charger status panel is illuminated.

Note: If the charger is left plugged in, the charger will automatically restart a complete charge cycle if the batteries voltage drops
below a minimum voltage or 30 1/8 " days has elapsed

3.3.1 Delta-Q - Battery Charger

1. AC Voltage Input Plug 2. Charge Indicator LEDs

Note: Some items are removed for illustration purposes only. For charger specifications, Refer to Section — Battery Charger, page 15.

• AC Power On - BLUE LED ON

• Low State of Charge - Bottom Panel - GREEN LED Flashing - Top Panel - GREEN LED OFF.

• High State of Charge - Bottom Panel - GREEN LED ON - Top Panel - GREEN LED Flashing.

• Charge Complete - Bottom Panel - GREEN LED ON - Top Panel - GREEN LED ON.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 59


Chassis and Scissor Arms

• Fault Indicator - RED LED ON.

• External Error Condition Caution - AMBER LED Flashing.

3.3.2 Green Power - Battery Charger

1. AC Voltage Input Plug 3. DC Voltage Output Plug


2. Charger Interlock Cable 4. Charge Indicator

Note: Some items are removed for illustration purposes only. For charger specifications, Refer to Section — Battery Charger, page 15.

• Battery Charging - YELLOW LED - AGM - Flashes Quickly/FLOODED - Remains ON/ AGM-FLOODED - Flashes Slowly.

• Charge Complete - GREEN LED ON.

• Fault Indicator - RED LED ON.

• Performing Self-Diagnostic - YELLOW and GREEN LEDs Flashing Simultaneously.

If required, further general and troubleshooting information about the battery charger can be found in the charger manufacturers
Owner’s Guide.

3.3.3 CAN - Battery Charger

60 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

1. AC Voltage Input Plug 2. Charge Indicator LEDs

Note: Some items are removed for illustration purposes only. For charger specifications, Refer to Section — Battery Charger, page 15.

• AC Power On - BLUE LED ON

• Low State of Charge - Bottom Panel - GREEN LED Flashing - Top Panel - GREEN LED OFF.

• High State of Charge - Bottom Panel - GREEN LED ON - Top Panel - GREEN LED Flashing.

• Charge Complete - Bottom Panel - GREEN LED ON - Top Panel - GREEN LED ON.

• Fault Indicator - RED LED ON.

• External Error Condition Caution - AMBER LED Flashing.

3.3.4 Battery Charger Maintenance

CAUTION
Use charger only on battery systems with an algorithm selected that is appropriate
to the specific battery type. Other usage may cause personal injury and damage.
Lead acid batteries may generate explosive hydrogen gas during normal operation.
Keep sparks, flames, and smoking materials away from batteries. Provide adequate
ventilation during charging. Never charge a frozen battery.
Study all battery manufacturers’ specific precautions such as recommended rates of
charge and removing or not removing cell caps while charging.

CAUTION
Only plug the charger into a properly installed and grounded outlet. Do not use
ground adaptors or modify plug. Do not touch non-insulated portion of output
connector or non-insulated battery terminal.
Do not operate charger if the ac supply cord is damaged or if the charger has
received a sharp blow, been dropped, or otherwise damaged in any way.
Always disconnect the charger ac supply before making or breaking the (pos/neg)
connections to the battery. Do not open or disassemble charger.

1. For flooded lead-acid batteries, regularly check water levels of each battery cell after charging and add distilled water as required
to level specified by battery manufacturer. Follow the safety instructions recommended by the battery manufacturer.

2. Make sure charger connections to battery terminals are tight and clean.

3. Do not expose charger to oil or to direct heavy water spraying when cleaning vehicle.

Excessive Battery Watering Requirements or Strong Sulphur (Rotten Egg) Smell


These symptoms indicate over-charging or high battery temperature. These symptoms are unlikely to be caused by too high a charge
current since the maximum charge current of the charger will be small compared to even a moderately sized battery pack. The most
likely cause for this problem is incorrect charge algorithm setting and/or high ambient temperatures.

1. Confirm that the battery pack is not too small - usually > 50Ah.

2. Confirm that the nominal battery voltage matches the charger output voltage.

3. If the output voltage of the charger seems excessive, return the charger for service. Contact JLG to get the expected battery
voltage settings for the charger in question. Be sure to have the charger’s serial number and charge algorithm setting available
when calling.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 61


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Table 5. Diagnostic Trouble Codes (Delta Q Battery Charger)


DTC Fault Solution
E-0-0-1 Check the battery voltage and cable connections. Check battery size and condition. This error will
Battery high voltage
E-0-2-1 automatically clear once the condition has been corrected.

E-0-0-2 Check the battery voltage and cable connections. Check battery size and condition. This error will
Battery low voltage
E-0-2-2 automatically clear once the condition has been corrected.

Possible causes: Charger output reduced due to high temperatures, poor batter y health, very deeply
Charge time out caused by battery pack discharged battery and /or poorly connected battery.
E-0-0-3 not reaching required voltage within safe
time limit. Possible solutions: Operate at lower ambient temperature. Replace battery pack. Check DC connections.
This error will automatically clear once the charger is reset by cycling DC.

Check for shorted or damaged cells. Replace battery pack. Check DC connections. This error will
E-0-0-4 Battery could not meet minimum voltage
automatically clear once the charger is reset by cycling DC.

Possible causes include poor battery health, ve y deeply discharged battery, poorly connected batter y,
and / or high parasitic loads on battery while charging.
E-0-0-7 Battery amp hour limit exceeded
Possible solutions: Replace battery pack. Check DC connections. Disconnect parasitic loads. This error will
automatically clear once the charger is reset by cycling DC.

Possible battery temperature sensor error. Check temperature sensor and connections. Reset charger. This
E-0-0-8 Battery temperature is out of range
error will automatically clear once the condition has been corrected.

Reverse polarity error Battery is connected to the charger incorrectly. Check the battery connections. This error will automatically
E-0-1-2
clear once the condition has been corrected.
E-0-1-6
Software upgrade failure or script operation failure. Ensure the USB flash drive is properly formatted and
E-0-1-8 USB operation failed (Software)
retry inserting the USB flash drive into the charger.
E-0-2-6
E-0-1-7 USB operation failed (Hardware) Remove and reinsert the USB drive. If condition persists, cycle AC and retry by reinserting the USB drive.

Connect charger to an AC source that provides stable AC between 85 - 270 VAC / 45 - 65 Hz. This error
E-0-2-3 High AC voltage error (>270 VAC)
will automatically clear once the condition has been corrected.

E-0-2-4 Charger failed to initialize The charger has failed to turn on properly. Disconnect AC input and battery for 30 seconds before retrying.

AC source is unstable. Could be caused by undersized generator and /or severely undersized input cables.
E-0-2-5 Low AC voltage oscillation error Connect charger to an AC source that provides stable AC between 85 - 270 VAC / 45-65 Hz. This error will
automatically clear once the condition has been corrected.

Internal charger fault. Remove AC and batter y for minimum 30 seconds and retry charger. If itfails again,
F-0-0-1, F-0-0-2, F-0-0-3, F-0-0-4, F-0-0-6
please contact the manufacturer of your vehicle or machine.

Table 6. Fault Codes (Green Power)


Flash Code Cause Solution
1) Check battery connection is correct.

1 Connection Issue 2) Check charger connection is correct.


3) Check each battery is good.

1) Check AC input cord is connected between charger and AC outlet.


2 Abnormal AC Power Input (Voltage)
2) Make sure AC plug is tightly secured into AC outlet.

1) Charger shuts down and goes into protection mode due to charger/environmental
3 Charger High Temperature Protection temperature is too high for charger to function properly. Please place the charger into
an area with ambient air flow or to a cooler place.

62 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Table 6. Fault Codes (Green Power) (continued)


Flash Code Cause Solution
2) Disconnect the charger and wait for 15-20 mins before reconnecting for charging.

1) Charger will reduce or even stop charging when the battery temperature exceeds
Battery High Temperature Protection 50° C. This is to avoid battery overheating.
4
2) Disconnect the charger and wait for 15-20 mins before reconnecting for charging.

5 Output Current is too high Return to factor y for repair.

6 Battery Voltage is too high(>30.5V) Check and assure that the correct output batter y voltage is connected.

7 Battery Voltage is too low(<18V) Check and assure that the correct output batter y voltage is connected.

Table 7. Battery Charger Calibration


Menu Submenus Comments
Calibrations: Set Charger The technician chooses to calibrate by pressing ENTER, leave by pressing ESC

CAL Algorithm: The technician chooses to calibrate by pressing ENTER or leave by pressing ESC.
YES: ENTER; NO: ESC
Charger Inactive The charger is not detected on the CAN bus. This prompts the user to power the charger to wake
Connect AC up the CAN board on the charger. The analyzer will move to the CHARGER DETECTED screen
automatically once the CAN board wakes up.

Charger Detected The Charger is reporting that it is connected to a wall outlet. The Algorithm can only be changed
Disconnect AC when the charger is disconnected from an AC source. This prompts the user to disconnect AC before
switching to the BATTERY CAPACITY screen.
Battery Capacity The Battery Capacity uses the same interface to adjust numbers as the Access Level Screen. This
XXX Ah should speed up the calibration process for the end user. The range is limited by vehicle
model. Pressing ESC will take you to the SET CHARGER: CAL FAIL screen.

Set Algorithm: All available algorithms listed in the GM that meet the Chemistry and a Capacity range of the
XXX selected vehicle can be cycled through by pressing Up Arrow or Down Arrow on the
analyzer. Pressing ENTER will attempt to set the displayed algorithm in the charger. Pressing ESC
will take you to the SET CHARGER: CAL FAIL screen.

Set Charger: The parameters were correctly written from the SET ALGORITHM screen. Press ESC to return to the
Complete! CALIBRATIONS menu.
Set Charger: An error occurred and the parameters were not written correctly, or Algorithm is not present in the
CAL Fail charger. Press ESC to return to the CALIBRATIONS menu.

3.4 LOGIC CONTROL MODULE INSTALLATION

All machine electrical functions are controlled through the logic control module, the logic control module also monitors all the
machine’s electrical systems. If a system fault should happen with the logic module or one of the machine’s electrical systems, the logic
module will generate a DTC code. Refer to Section — DTC Table, page 182 for diagnostic information concerning any DTC code
generated by the logic module.

3.4.1 Module Access


1. Open the right side compartment to access the logic control module.

3.4.2 To Remove the Module from the Machine


1. Disconnect machine power at the positive (+) battery cable or use quick disconnect, if equipped.

2. Mark or note the harness connector positions before removing from the module.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 63


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3. Disconnect the harness connectors from the front of the module.

4. Remove the three bolts, nuts and washers, two on top and one on bottom of module, to remove the module from it’s mounting
plate.

Re-install by reversing the above steps.

Figure 7. Logic Module Components

1. Logic Module Assembly 3. Main Harness Connectors

2. Module Mounting Bolts/Nuts and Washers

Note: * Torque mounting bolts (M8) - 14.16 ft. lb. (19.2 Nm) max.

Figure 8. Logic Module CO01 - Harness Connector Identification

1. CO01 - V1 Connector - 8 Pin 4. CO01- V4 Connector - 20 Pin


2. CO01 - V2 Connector - 20 Pin 5. CO01 - V5 Connector - 20 Pin
3. CO01 - V3 Connector - 20 Pin

Note: For detailed connector pin assignments refer to the Electrical Schematic in Section — Electrical Schematics, page 215.

64 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.5 MAIN POWER CONTACTOR RELAY AND DRIVE CONTROL MODULE

The main power contactor relay and power control module are accessible by opening the left side swing out compartment door, next to
the batteries.

NOTICE
Disconnect main power from the batteries before attempting to remove the main
power contactor relay or servicing the electrical system. Failure to do so could
cause damage to the machines electrical components.

Figure 9. Main Power Contactor Relay and Drive Controller Module Location

1. Main Drive Contactor Relay 6. Drive Control Module

2. Battery (+) Cable 7. To Pump (–) terminal

3. From Machine Logic Control Module 8. To Battery (–) terminal

4. To Drive Controller B (+) Post


5. Battery Charger Output (+) To Battery (+) Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 65


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.6 DRIVE CONTROL MODULE

The power control module is located right side of the machine inside the compartment as shown in Figure - Drive Module - Installation,
page 66 below. Use the following instructions when removing and installing the power module.

Figure 10. Drive Module - Installation

1. Drive Module 2. Mounting Screws

3.6.1 Removal
1. Turn off power machine power and disconnect the batteries.

Note: Note the wire terminal locations when removing the Power Module.

2. Disconnect all wires from the power module and remove the module mounting bolts, remove module from the machine.

3.6.2 Installation
1. Be sure that the terminals are oriented as shown.

2. After installing the power module, begin connecting the wires back to the controller. Reference.

NOTICE
Do not overtighten the terminal bolts, or damage to the unit could occur.

3. Torque the terminal bolts to 7 ft. lb. (10 Nm)

4. After all connections to the power module are made, the battery can be reconnected.

66 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

MAF14080C

Figure 11. Drive Module Terminals

1. B - (Battery (–) terminal) 5. V - Left Motor (+) terminal

2. B - (Pump (+) terminal) 6. U - (Right Motor (–) terminal)

3. W - (Left Motor (–) & Right Motor (+) terminal) 7. To Relay B (+)

4. P - (Pump (–) terminal)

Table 8. Power Module Specification


Nominal Operating Voltage ( B+): 24 VDC

Over Voltage Cutoff: 35 VDC

Under Voltage Limits: 10 VDC


Maximum Current Limits
2 Min. Rated Current: 120 A
Continuous Rated Current: 55 A
For Pump DC Motor
Maximum Current: 270 A
Operating Temperature Range -40° F to 104° F (-40° C to 40° C)

Terminal Bolt Torque: 5.16 ± 1.03 ft. lb. (7 ± 1.4 Nm )

Maximum Inverter Temperature (At full Power) 185° F (85° C)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 67


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 12. Hydraulic Pump Control - Power Connections

1. Batteries 4. Hydraulic Pump Motor 7. To Battery Charger (+)

2. Main Power Contactor Relay 5. To Logic Module Controller 8. To Battery Charger (–)

3. Drive Control Module 6. To Logic Control Module 9. Battery Quick-Disconnect

3.7 DRIVE MODULE ELECTRICAL EVALUATION

Several basic electrical tests can be performed on the Power Module. Failure of one of these evaluations is significant and may indicate
that the device is physically damaged. If a Power Module is suspected to be faulty, thoroughly examine the rest of the system for
possible damage.
Make all measurements with a voltmeter set to resistance scale (Ohms) (Refer to Section - Resistance Measurement). Disconnect the Main
Battery, all the power cables and the Ampseal connector from the Power Module during this analysis.
Discharge the power capacitors inside the controller connecting a power resistor (for example 8.20 Ohm 50W) between +B power post
and -B power post of the controller (connect resistor for 2-3 sec).
Using voltmeter verify that voltage between +B and -B is 0V. Proceed with measurements with a voltmeter set to a resistance scale
(Ohms). Proceed with measurements with a voltmeter set to a resistance scale (ohms).

68 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

1. Resistance >100k Ohms All Terminals To Housing


Ensure that there is an open-circuit between all terminals of the Power Module and the module's aluminium housing. Electronics
are insulated from the housing. Place the Black meter lead on the housing and use the red meter load to probe all terminals.

2. Resistance > 10k Ohms Between Motor Phase Terminal And +b Terminal
Internally there is a MOS-FET transistor between these terminals that should be high-impedance when the module is unpowered.
Place the Black meter lead on the motor phase (for example U) and use the Red meter load on +B power terminals.
Repeat same measure for all the three phases (U, V and W).

3. Resistance > 10k Ohms Between Motor Phase Terminal And -b Terminal
Internally there is a MOS-FET transistor between these terminals that should be high-impedance when the module is unpowered.
Place the Black meter lead on the motor phase (for example U) and use the Red meter load on +B power terminals.
Repeat same measure for all the three phases (U, V and W).

4. Resistance > 130k Ohms Pump Phase Terminal (-P) And +B Terminal
Internally there is a MOS-FET transistor between these terminals that should be high-impedance when the module is unpowered.
Place the Black meter lead on the pump phase (-P) and use the red meter load on +B power terminals.

5. Resistance > 130k Ohms Pump Phase Terminal (-P) And -B Terminal
Internally there is a MOS-FET transistor between these terminals that should be high-impedance when the module is unpowered
Place the Red meter lead on the pump phase (-P) and use the Black meter load on-B power terminals.

3.8 TRACTION SYSTEM

3.8.1 Theory of Operation


The traction, or drive system, moves the vehicle along the ground by electric motors. The Armatures (rotating windings) of the PM
(Permanent Magnet) drive motors are wired to the Power Module's U, V and W terminals. The U terminal connects to black wire of right
motor, the V terminal connects to Red wire of Left Motor, the W terminal connects to Red wire of Right Motor and Black wire of left
motor together.
To provide variable speed control, the Armature MOSFET transistors switch On and Off at high frequencies (PWM/pulse width
modulation; 16kHz). The Duty Cycle (On & Off time) is varied to control the voltage applied to the Armatures. When the MOSFET's spend
50% of the period On and 50% Off, approximately ½ of the available power will be applied to the Armatures (50% Duty Cycle). Similarly,
the MOSFET are On continuously (100% Duty Cycle) to apply all available Battery power to the Armatures (as in Driving at Full Speed).
Instead of electro-magnets (called Field Windings), the permanent magnet drive motors use permanent magnets located in the stator
(non-rotating) portion of the motor. The magnetism from permanent magnets cannot be adjusted by the Power Module, but permanent
magnet drive motors have very good power density and torque which can provide strong electro-motive force when climbing a grade at
low speeds. The noise and RPM capability are also good performance.

3.8.2 Common Traction System Difficulties


1. Ground Module Interlocks
There are a variety of interlocks that prevent Drive due to system events (Elevated but Pot- Hole Mechanism Failed to Deploy, etc.).
Before investigating Traction System issues, examine the JLG Analyzer's HELP Menu while attempting to Drive from Platform
Mode. Refer to the Section - JLG Control System , page 150 for explanation of the JLG Analyzer Help Messages.

2. Power Module Diagnostic Issues


For simple visual diagnosis of system faults and to monitor system status, a red LED is provided on the body of the controller.
The Power Module executes a self-test during every power-up to ensure proper functionality. If a Diagnostic Issue is detected, the
Power Module will not energize the Line Contactor. Instead, it will flash the Red LED, a different number of times, in a repeated
pattern, when there is a fault. The number of flashes indicates the type of fault. Please connect JLG Analyzer to diagnostic.

3. Open-Circuit Motor Armature


This issue will not allow the vehicle to drive, investigate for issues like improper crimps, loose terminals, corrosion and resistance
between Armature cables (heavy red and black conductors).

4. Short-Circuit Motor Armature


This issue will not allow the vehicle to drive. To find the source of the difficulty. Investigate for crushed and burned cables. Note if
the drive motor smells burned.

5. Short-Circuit Brake Release


This issue will not allow the vehicle to drive. This situation can be investigated by using JLG analyzer. It will display "POWER
MODULE BREAK WIRING ISSUE".

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 69


Chassis and Scissor Arms

6. Open-Circuit Brake Release


This issue happened on Right drive motor brake will not allow the vehicle to drive. This situation can be investigated by using JLG
Analyzer. It will display "POWER MODULE BRAKE WIRING ISSUE".
This issue happened on Left drive motor brake will allow the vehicle to drive. Continued attempts to drive the vehicle may result
motor overheating and armature damage. The Ground Module and ZAPI Power Module cannot detect this fault during power-up
or self-test. This situation can be detected by elevating the vehicle's front wheels and engaging drive (platform stowed). The motor
will not rotate.

3.9 DRIVE MOTOR ELECTRICAL EVALUATION

Several basic electrical tests can be performed on the Drive Motors. Failure of one of these evaluations is significant and may indicate
that the device is physically damaged. If a Power Module is suspected to be faulty, thoroughly examine the rest of the system for
possible damage.
Make all measurements with a voltmeter set to resistance scale (Ohms) (Section - Resistance Measurement). Disconnect the Main Battery,
all the power cables and the Ampseal connector from the Power Module during this analysis.

1. Resistance < 2 Ohms Heavy Red to Heavy Black Armature Wires


The heavy red and black conductors are connected to the motor's armature winding. The winding is a very low impedance and
should appear to be a short-circuit for an ordinary voltmeter
High resistance can signal corrosion, improper crimps, damaged cabling, worn brushes, a faulty commutator, or an open armature
winding.

2. Resistance 28±2 Ohms Red to Black Brake Wires


The red and black wires insert to a 2-way Deutsch connector are connected to the integral brake.
Improper resistance can signal corrosion, improper crimps, damaged cabling, or a faulty solenoid.

3. Resistance ≥5 Mega Ohms Red Armature Wire to Motor Housing


The armature winding should be electrically isolated from the motor housing. Low resistance may be an indication of a crushed
cable, a burned cable, or a burned armature winding.
Investigate by disconnecting the drive motor cable from the motor and re-measure resistance (isolation).

70 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.10 TORQUE HUB

NOTICE
The procedures within this section apply to all machines and torque hubs.
Procedures that apply to specific machines and torque hubs will be so noted by
proper serial numbers.

Note: These instructions will cover how to completely assemble and disassemble the Torque-Hub unit. However, if the unit is under
warranty you should contact JLG Industries, Inc. for a replacement unit. The warranty will no longer be valid if the unit is
disassembled by non-JLG personnel.

NOTICE
Torque hub units should always be roll and leak tested before disassembly and
after assembly to make sure that the unit’s gears and sealants are working properly.

Torque-Hub units should always be roll and leak tested before disassembly and after assembly to make sure that the unit's gears,
bearings and seals are working properly. The following information briefly outlines what to look for when performing these tests.

WARNING
If the machine is on any incline, the wheels must be adequately blocked prior to
manually disengaging the brakes. Failure to do so may result in injury or even
death.

Note: The brake must be released before performing the roll test. This can be accomplished by connecting the brake release cable and
depressing button. The brake can also be released by following the manual disengage procedures outlined in this section.

CAUTION
Return brake release cable before returning to normal operation.

3.10.1 Roll Test


The purpose of the roll test is to determine if the unit's gears are rotating freely and properly. You should be able to rotate the wheel or
hub of the gearbox by hand. If you feel more drag in the gears only at certain points, then the gears are not rolling freely and should be
examined for improper installation or defects. Some gear packages roll with more difficulty than others. Do not be concerned if the
gears in your unit seem to roll hard as long as they roll with consistency.

3.10.2 Leak Test


The purpose of a leak test is to make sure the unit is air tight. You can tell if your unit has a leak if the pressure gauge reading on your
leak checking fitting starts to fall after the unit has been pressurized and allowed to equalize. Leaks will most likely occur at the pipe
plugs, the main seal or wherever o-rings are located. The exact location of a leak can usually be detected by brushing a soap and water
solution around the main seal and where the o-rings or gaskets meet on the exterior of the unit, then checking for air bubbles. If a leak is
detected in a seal, o-ring or gasket, the part must be replaced, and the unit rechecked. Leak test at 10 psi for 20 minutes.

Note: Due to the small air volume inside this Torque-Hub, it will pressurize to 10 psi very quickly. If the pressure becomes excessive in
the unit the seals will be destroyed.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 71


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.10.3 Oil Check/Fill Procedure


The torque hub unit is shipped with EP85. It is designed to utilize the same oil throughout its service life. However, should it need to be
checked/serviced use the following procedure.
In the event of servicing, fill the unit with EP85.

Note: The gearbox capacity is 10 oz of oil.

1. To check the oil level, rotate the wheel so that the plugs in the cover are at 12 o-clock and 3 o-clock.

2. Allow the oil to settle than slowly remove the plug at 3 o-clock.

3. If oil begins to come out the oil level is sufficient.

4. If no oil is noticed at the 3 o-clock plug remove both plugs.

5. Slowly add oil at the 12 o-clock plug location until oil begins to seep out at the 3 o-clock plug location.

6. Apply pipe dope or teflon tape to the cover plugs and reinstall into the cover.

7. Tighten to 6 ft. lbs. - 8 ft. lbs. (8.4 Nm to 11.2 Nm).

3.10.4 Drive Motor Removal

Figure 13. Motor Removal

1. Drive Motor 3. Washers


2. Motor Mounting Bolts

CAUTION
Ensure the battery disconnect switch is in the off position before removing drive
motor.

1. Disconnect the motor cable from the power control module.

2. Drain the oil out of the unit by removing the cover plug. Note the condition of the oil, replace if necessary.

72 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3. Remove the two motor mounting bolts and washers.

4. Gently remove the drive motor (1).

3.10.5 Primary Planet Carrier Disassembly

Figure 14. Primary Planet Carrier Disassembly

2A. Primary Carrier 2E. Planet Pin

2B. Sun Gear 2F. Retaining Ring

2C. Support Plate 2G. Planet Gear Washer


2D. Primary Planet Gear 2H. Slide Bearing

1. Rotate planet gears (2D) to check for abnormal noise or roughness in bearings (2H) or planet shafts (2E).

2. Take away three snap rings (2F) with pointed-nose pliers.

3. Press planet pins (2E) out of carrier (2A).

4. Inspect all planet gear (2D) for abnormal wear or damaged.

5. Remove planet gears (2D), thrust washers (2G), and the retaining ring (2C). The planets are a matched set, and all three should be
replaced if damaged.

6. Sun gear (2B) was loose fit with the carrier.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 73


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.10.6 Spindle Carrier Disassembly

Figure 15. Spindle Carrier Disassembly

3A. Spindle Carrier 3F. Ball Bearing 3K. Flange Plug


3B. Secondary Planet Gear 3G. Pin 3L. Slide Bearing

3C. Planet Gear Washer 3H. Retaining Ring 3M. Thrust Washer
3D. Planet Gear Washer 3I. Lip Seal 3N. Dowel Pin

3E. Planet Shaft 3J. O-ring

1. Remove the output seal (3I) and replace it after it damaged.

2. Take away the snap rings (3H) with pointed-nose pliers. Use the copper bar to press the carrier sub assembly out of the housing
(from the seal direction).

3. Drive the roll pins (3G) out of the planet shafts (3E).

4. Press the planet pins (3E) out of the carrier (3A).

5. Replace bearings (3F) if damaged.

6. Take out the sun thrust washer (3M) and remove the three dowel pins (3N).

3.10.7 Primary Planet Carrier Assembly

Note: Refer to Figure - Primary Planet Carrier Disassembly.

1. Install sliding bearings (2H) and thrust washers (2G) into planet gears (2D). Make sure that all bearings are seated around bore.
Repeat this step for all three planet gears.

2. Install three roll pins (2E) into the specific carrier holes and go through the planet gears (2D).

3. Put the sun gear (2B) into the specific place.

74 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.10.8 Spindle Carrier Assembly

Note: Refer to Figure -Spindle Carrier Disassembly.

1. Press the washer (3M) and pin (3G) in the Spindle carrier (3A) if required.

2. Press one of the bearings (3F) in spindle carrier (3A). Bearing (3F) should be tight in housing bore and flush against housing
shoulder.

3. Press the sliding bearing (3L) inside of planet gear. Make sure that the sliding bearing are seated properly around the bore. Place a
planet gear with washer on left and right end side into carrier.

4. Apply small amount of grease to bore of planet gear (3B). Repeat this step for all three planet gears.

5. Pull out dummy planet shaft. Install planet shaft (3E) by lightly tapping down through carrier holes and planet gear. Make sure
planet shaft roll pin hole is aligned roll pin hole in carrier. Planet gear should rotate smoothly.

6. Then place the first carrier subassembly into the ring gear. Make sure the planet teeth engage with the ring gear teeth. Check all
gear meshes for proper clearance. Insure outboard bearing inner cone (3F) seats fully against spindle shoulder. If outboard bearing
is not seated fully, lightly tap bearing inner cone on inner hub until it seats properly.

7. Press other bearing (3F) in Spindle (3A) flange. Bearing should be tight in housing bore and flush against housing shoulder (3A).

8. Install the snap ring(3H) into groove of Spindle (3A). Extreme care should be taken to insure no damage to the seal spindle (3A)
occurs.

3.10.9 Motor and Brake Assembly

Note: Refer to Figure - Motor Removal.

1. Insert the drive motor into the back of the gearbox. The drive motor will pilot on the four bosses in the gearbox. Try to keep the
end of the motor shaft from causing damage to the lip seal in the gearbox.

Note: The motor may need to be rotated to line up the sun gear splines with the motor shaft splines.

2. Install the two motor mounting bolts and washers. Torque to 9 - 11 ft-lbs (12 - 15 Nm).

3. Connect the end of the Motor Cable to the Power Module.

4. Fill the gearbox with oil ISO grade 68 oil or oil of a similar viscosity (80W gear oil or 20W engine oil). The gearbox will need to be
filled with 10 oz of oil.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 75


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.11 DRIVE HUB

Figure 16. Drive Hub Components

1. End Cap Assembly 2. Primary carrier Sub-assembly 3. Spindle Carrier Assembly 3H. Retaining Ring

1A. End Cap 2A. Primary Carrier 3A. Spindle Carrier 3I. Lip Seal
1B. O-ring 2B. Sun Gear 3B. Secondary Planet Gear 3J. O-ring

1C. Lip Seal 2C. Support Plate 3C. Planet Gear Washer 3K. Flange Plug

1D. Bolt 2D. Primary Planet Gear 3D. Planet Gear Washer 3L. Slide Bearing

1E. Strong Magnet 2E. Planet Pin 3E. Planet Shaft 3M. Thrust Washer

1F. Thrust Washer 2F. Retaining Ring 3F. Ball Bearing 3N. Dowel Pin
1G. Ring Gear 2G. Slide Bearing 3G. Pin 4. Ring Gear

5. Electric Motor

76 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.12 DRIVE MOTOR CABLE ROUTING

CAUTION
Be sure to pull the battery disconnect anytime work is being performed on the
drive motors or drive motor cabling.

1. Orient the drive cables going back towards the rear of the machine as shown below.

2. Secure motor cable to spindle inside of the rod using tie strap.

1. Tie Strap

3. Adjust cable to ensure the cable not to interfere with cylinder when steering.

4. Loop the cables forward towards the front of the machine and back so that the clamping rings on the cables are aligned together.

5. Obtain the cable clamp and hardware.

1. Cable Clamp 3. Capscrew, Washers and Nut


2. Space Plate

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 77


Chassis and Scissor Arms

6. Place the cable clamp on the clamping rings as shown below.

1. Drive Cable 3. Cable Clamp


2. Spacer Plate

7. Bolt the clamp onto the plate which attaches to the frame.
a. The spacer plate goes below the clamp.
b. Place the Washer against the clamp.

8. Connect the drive motor cables to the drive module.

9. Tuck all wires into the drive module compartment and install cover.

10. Reconnect battery cable plug. Power up machine and operate the drive function to ensure drive motors operate properly.

78 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.13 GROUND CONTROL STATION

3.13.1 Components Location

1001243252-I

1. Ground/Platform/OFF Key Selector Switch 4. Hourmeter

2. Platform Lift/Lower Switch 5. Overload Indicator


3. Ground Emergency Stop Button 6. MDI - Indicator (If Equipped)

NOTICE
Disconnect main power from the batteries before attempting to service the
electrical system. Failure to do so could cause damage to the machines electrical
components.

3.13.2 Removal
1. Disconnect main power at the batteries.

2. Remove the two bolt, washers and nuts attaching the ground control panel to the frame.

3. When panel is released, pull the panel out.

4. Rotate the ground control station and position to unplug or disconnect the desired connectors and remove components on the
back of the panel.

3.13.3 Installation
1. Check that all components are installed into the control station panel and connected to the wiring harness on the back of the
panel.

2. Insert the control station into position on the machine and align the mounting holes in the panel with the mounting holes in the
frame.

3. Attach using the two mounting bolt, washers and nuts. Tighten securely.

4. Reconnect the main power at the batteries, power machine up and check machine operation.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 79


Chassis and Scissor Arms

MAF14600I

1. Ground Control Housing 4. Platform/OFF/Ground Select Switch 7. Hour Meter

2. Attach Bolt, Washers, and Nut 5. Platform UP/DOWN Switch 8. Overload Indicator
3. Ground Control Bracket 6. Emergency Stop Switch 9. Multi-Display-Indicator (If Equipped)

Note: Refer to Section — Electrical Schematic, page 215 for wiring connections to switches and gauges.

1. Platform/OFF/Ground Selector 3. Emergency Stop Switch 5. Overload Indicator

2. Platform UP/DOWN Switch 4. Hour Meter 6. Multi-Display-Indicator (If Equipped)

80 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.14 PLATFORM CONTROL STATION

NOTICE
Power machine down at the ground control station before disconnecting the
platform control station.

3.14.1 Overview of Control Station Components

1. Emergency Stop Switch 9. Horn Button

2. Drive and Lift Select Switch 10. Battery Charge Indicator

3. Forward/Reverse/Lift/Lower Directional Decal 11. System Fault Indicator

4. Steer Control Switch and Decal 12. Alarm


5. Drive and Lift Joystick Control 13. Indoor/Outdoor Operation Indicator

6. Trigger (Enable) Switch 14. Indoor/Outdoor Operation Mode Switch

7. Overload Indicator 15. Speed Select Switch


8. Machine Tilt Indicator 16. Variable Tilt - Platform Restricted Height Indicator

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 81


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.14.2 Installation/Removal
1. Disconnect the platform control station harness (1) from the round connector on front of the control station.

2. Remove the mounting pin (2) securing the control station to the platform station mount, lift up and swing tab out of slot in
mount, remove control station from the machine.

1. Harness Connector 3. Lift and Remove


2. Mounting Pin

3. To install, reverse steps 1 and 2 above.

82 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.14.3 Control Station Disassembly


1. Place the platform control station assembly on a suitable work bench.

2. Remove the main body from the mount, by removing the long through bolt, cap-nut and washers (1) and the bolts and washers
(2) on the bottom of the assembly.

1. Through Bolt, Cap-nut and Washers 2. Rear Edge Bolts and Nuts

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 83


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3. To install, reverse steps 1 and 2 above.

SC100011A

1. Drive, Lift and Steer Joystick Control 6. Indoor/outdoor Operation Switch

2. Indicator Panel Module 7. Alarm


3. Drive and Lift Select Switch 8. Main Harness Connector
4. Emergency Stop Switch 9. Speed Select Switch

5. Horn Button Switch

3.14.4 Joystick Controller

Figure 17. Joystick

84 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Table 9. Joystick Specifications


Input Voltage +5 (±0.1) VDC
Current Consumption 10 mA @ 12 VDC
Output: Handle Centered 2.5 (±0.1) VDC
Output: Full Positive (Reverse) Deflection 4 (±0.1) VDC

Output: Full Negative (Forward) Deflection 1 (±0.1) VDC

Note: For joystick calibration procedure refer to Section — Joystick Calibration, page 156.

Table 10. Connector Chart


CONNECTOR PINOUT
Term Color Function
1 RED HANDLE COM
2 VIOLET TRIGGER N.O.
3 - SPARE
4 YELLOW ROCKER RT
5 GREEN ROCKER LT
6 - SPARE
7 WHITE/RED +5VDC
8 WHITE/BLACK GROUND
9 BROWN SIG OUTPUT

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 85


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.15 TILT SENSOR INSTALLATION

The tilt sensor is located inside the left side machine compartment door on mounting plate towards front of machine.

1. Tilt Sensor 3. Mounting Hardware Torque to 9 ft. lb. (12 Nm))

2. Mounting Plate 4. Wire Harness Connector

(Pothole bar removed for clarity)

3.15.1 Tilt Sensor Removal


1. Open left side compartment door, disconnect the battery power from the machine.

2. Locate the tilt sensor on the frame mounting plate next to the left side compartment door hinge assembly. Unplug the tilt sensor
harness connector.

3. Remove the two (3) mounting bolts and lock nuts attaching the sensor to the mounting plate.

3.15.2 Tilt Sensor Installation


1. Before mounting the tilt sensor to the base frame, check the mating surfaces of the sensor and the mounting plate, be certain
there is no debris or burrs to prevent a flush mount.

2. When mounting the tilt sensor back into the base frame, mount with the wiring harness pointing to the rear of the machine. Align
the two (3) mounting holes of the sensor with the holes in the mounting plate on the base frame.

3. Secure tilt sensor onto mounting plate with mounting hardware.

4. Plug the wire harness connector into the tilt sensor.

5. Reconnect the battery power to the machine.

6. Start the machine and check tilt sensor calibration with handheld analyzer. Refer to Section — Tilt Sensor Calibration, page 157 for
tilt sensor calibration procedure.

86 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Table 11. Tilt Sensor Wiring Pin Assignment

Pin Function Wire Color Description

1 Vcc WHT +8 to 30 V (32 V MAX)


2 GND YEL GROUND
3 CANH GRN CAN HIGH LINE
4 CANL BRN CAN LOW LINE

3.16 SCISSOR ARM - ROTARY ANGLE SENSOR

This machine is equipped with a scissor arm rotary angle sensor switch. This sensor communicates with the machine control module to
determine platform height.
This sensor works in tandem with the lift cylinder pressure switch to accurately determine platform load for any given platform height.
There is no adjustment to the angle sensor switch, just install in the proper orientation and calibrate.

1. Front of Machine 2. Rotary Angle Sensor

3.16.1 Rotary Angle Sensor Installation


1. Install angle sensor to mounting bracket with wire lead pointing away from bend in mounting bracket. Secure with bolts, locknuts
and washers.

2. Insert key into slot in the scissor arm pin with the narrow tab end pointing away from the pin.

3. Align Angle Sensor and slide the sensor bracket until sensor key is centered in the arm pin slot as shown (1).

4. Carefully rotate sensor and bracket to load sensor spring until holes in the bracket line up with slots on frame mounting plate (2).
Rotation is approximately 120°, or 1/3 of a turn.

5. Secure mounting bracket to frame with bolts, washers and lockouts. Properly align rotating sensor slot and key to freely rotate
together when arm stack is elevated. Secure all hardware.

6. Calibrate the sensor after installation. (Refer to Section — Rotary Angle Sensor Calibration, page 158).

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 87


Chassis and Scissor Arms

MAF13860L

1. Pre-Load Installation Angle 2. Final Position Installation

88 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.17 POTHOLE PROTECTION SYSTEM COMPONENTS

Figure 18. Pothole Protection Assembly

WARNING
Never work under an elevated platform until it has been restrained from movement
with safety props, blocking, or overhead sling.

1. Install flange bearings into the frame holes with the flange side facing outside of frame against pothole bar hinge.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 89


Chassis and Scissor Arms

2. PHP Bearing Adjustment - If reassembling or replacing PHP components, PHP bars may not store at same height due to
manufacturing tolerances of parts. Adjustment may be needed after assembly:
a. Completely lower the platform and compress the actuator assembly to raise the PHP bars, check to see If only one PHP bar is
raised against the frame.
b. If Yes, elevate the platform to release the actuator assembly and deploy the PHP bars. The actuator bearing bracket (2) allows
for some side to side adjustment, mark the current position of the actuator bearing bracket (2) on the frame.
c. Loosen and move the actuator bearing bracket slightly towards the PHP bar that will not raise completely, and re-tighten
bracket down.
d. Compress the actuator assembly again to stow the PHP bars and check bar ground clearance. Repeat steps (a) through (c)
above until both PHP bars achieve maximum ground clearance. (Refer to Ground Clearance - Section — General Specifications,
page 12).

3. Do not tighten limit switch mounting screws beyond 31 in. lb. (3.5 Nm).

4. PHP Limit Switch Adjustment - When the platform is raised and PHP bars fully DOWN, adjust the switch until it lightly contacts the
ramp on the lower actuator.

90 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.18 STEER AND SPINDLE ASSEMBLY COMPONENTS

Figure 19. Steer and Spindle Assembly Installation

1. Mount steer cylinder with ports facing the rear of the machine. 3. Install bushing with flange on top.

2. Apply Medium Strength Threadlocking Compound to bolt threads before tightening 4. Spindle weldment interchangeable with either side.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 91


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.18.1 Drive Motor Covers Installation

1. Drive Motor Cover 2. Cover carriage bolts, washers, and self-locking nuts

Note: Cover installation same for both sides.

3.18.2 Tire Wear and Damage


The tire and rim assemblies installed on machines have been approved by the tire manufacturer for applications in which those products
are intended to be used. The tire and rims installed on each product model have been designed for stability requirements, which consist
of track width, tire compound, and load capacity. Tire changes such as rim width, centerpiece location, larger or smaller diameter, tire
compound, etc., without written manufacturers approval, could result in an unsafe condition regarding stability.
The tires and rims installed on machines are to be inspected daily as part of the daily walk-around inspection. JLG requires that the daily
walk-around inspection be performed at each operator change during a shift and at each shift change.

3.18.3 Wheel and Tire Replacement


JLG recommends that any replacement tire be the same size and brand as originally installed on the machine or offered by JLG as an
approved replacement. Please refer to the JLG Parts Manual for the part number of the approved tires for a particular machine model.
If any of the following is discovered during tire inspection, measures must be taken to remove the JLG product from service
immediately. Arrangements must be made for replacement of the tire(s) or tire assemblies. Both tires/wheels on the same axle must be
replaced:

• If the overall diameter of the tire is less than one of the following:
76 x 255 Tire - 9.5 in. (243 mm) minimum

• If any uneven wear is discovered.


A tire with significant damage in the tread area or sidewall requires immediate evaluation before placing the machine into service. If
a cut, tear, chunk, or other discrepancy exceeds any one or more of the following dimensions, the tire must be replaced:
3.0 in. (76 mm) long
0.75 in. (19 mm) wide
0.75 in. (19 mm) deep

• If the metal wheel is visible at any point through the tread area of the tire.

• If more than one discrepancy exists in any quadrant of the wheel (within 90 degrees of one another).

92 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.18.4 Wheel Installation


It is extremely important to apply and maintain proper wheel mounting torque.

WARNING
Wheel mounting bolts must be installed and maintained at the proper torque to
prevent loose wheels, a broken nut, and possible separation of wheel from the axle.

Tighten the mounting bolts to the proper torque to prevent wheels from coming loose. Use a torque wrench to tighten the mounting
bolts. The proper procedure for attaching wheels is as follows:

1. Install wheel (1) onto hub (2).

2. Start mounting bolts (3) by hand to prevent cross threading. DO NOT use a lubricant on threads.

3. Tighten bolts in the following sequence:

4. Tighten bolts in stages. Following the recommended sequence, tighten bolts per wheel torque of 43 ft. lb. (58 Nm).

5. Wheel mounting bolts should be torqued after the first hours of operation and after each wheel removal. Check torque every 3
months or 150 hours of operation.

1. Wheel 3. Mounting Bolts

2. Hub

3.19 ARMS AND PLATFORM POSITIONING AND SUPPORT

WARNING
Never work under an elevated platform until it has been restrained from movement
with safety props, blocking or overhead sling.

The arm stack can be supported by using an overhead crane, refer to Figure — Arms and Platform Positioning with Overhead Support. If
an overhead crane is not available the stack may also be lifted by using a fork-truck using the following instructions:

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 93


Chassis and Scissor Arms

1. With the forks on the fork-truck slid close together, enter from the front of the machine and place the forks on the cross tube of
the second arm assembly below the platform.

2. Slowly lift the arm stack with the fork-truck while the manual descent valve is being engaged (this allows the oil to drain back into
the tank).

3. Place machine on safety prop and leave the fork truck in place.

4. At this point the lift cylinder removal may begin. (Refer to Section — Lift Cylinder Removal, page 138)

If removal of the platform becomes necessary use the above procedure to stabilize the platform for pin and platform removal.

3.20 PLATFORM REMOVAL

Note: Refer to Figure — Platform Assembly - Installation/Removal.

1. Support the platform using an overhead crane with straps capable of lifting at least 500 lb (227 kg) refer to Figure — Arms and
Platform Positioning with Overhead Support.

2. Disconnect the battery plug at the chassis and remove the platform control station and wiring harness at the platform. Disconnect
AC receptacle cable if applicable. Route the cables out through the hole at the right-rear of the platform to free platform of any
constraints when lifting.

3. Remove the bolts attaching the pins and slide blocks at each corner to the arm stack. Carefully remove the four pins attaching the
platform to the arm stack.

4. Lift the platform from the arm stack and set aside.

Note: When attaching platform back onto scissor arm assembly, follow removal procedures in reverse order.

3.21 SCISSOR ARMS REMOVAL

1. Remove platform (refer to Section - Platform Removal, page 94).

2. Disconnect all wiring and cables attached to scissor arm assembly.

3. Remove lift cylinder (refer to Section - Lift Cylinder Removal, page 138).

4. The scissor arms can be removed as a complete unit or individually.

3.21.1 Removing Scissor Arm Assembly as a Complete Unit


1. Remove the rotary angle sensor.

2. Remove the ladder from the frame.

3. Remove the pins attaching the bottom scissor arms to the front of the frame by removing the pin attach bolts.

4. Place two straps around each end of the entire scissor arm assembly. Using an overhead crane, slowly and carefully move the arm
stack backwards so that slide blocks at rear of machine slide out the rear of the slide channel on the frame.

Note: Overhead crane and straps must be capable of lifting approximately 2000 lb (907 kg).

5. Once slide blocks are clear of machine, the scissor stack can be moved to a desirable location for further arm disassembly.

94 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

3.21.2 Removing/installing Scissor Arms Individually

Note: Refer to Figure - Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L - with LSS), page 98. and Figure - Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L - with LSS) - Pin
Configuration, page 99.

1. If reusing the pins, number each pin and journal before removing, so the pin can be reinstalled back in same location. Odd
numbers on one side and even numbers on other side.

2. With the platform removed, start with the top arms (closest to platform).

3. Secure each arm section being removed using an overhead crane with suitable lifting straps.

4. Remove the bolts securing the connecting pins in place.

5. Remove the pins from the arms.

6. Remove the arm section from the machine using the overhead crane.

7. Repeat previous steps for remaining arm sections.

Note: When attaching scissor arm assembly back onto frame, follow removal procedures in reverse order.

Self locking fasteners, such as nylon insert and thread deforming locknuts, are not intended to be reinstalled after removal. Always use
new replacement hardware when installing locking fasteners.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 95


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 20. Arms and Platform Positioning with Overhead Support

96 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 21. Platform Assembly - Installation/Removal

1. Pin 3. Hex Head Cap Screw 5. Pin 7. Hex Lock Nut

2. Upper Slide Block 4. Hex Lock Nut 6. Hex Head Cap Screw 8. Washer

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 97


Chassis and Scissor Arms

1001249876-L

Figure 22. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L - with LSS)

98 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

1001249876-L

Figure 23. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L - with LSS) - Pin Configuration

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 99


Chassis and Scissor Arms

1001239876-P

Figure 24. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L - with LSS)

100 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

1001239876-P

Figure 25. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L - with LSS) - Pin Configuration

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 101


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 26. Scissor Arm Assembly (without LSS)

102 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 27. Scissor Arm Assembly (without LSS) - Pin Configuration

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 103


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 28. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing w/o AC Cable

104 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 29. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing w/ AC Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 105


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 30. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) w/o AC Cable - Sheet 1 of 2

106 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 31. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) w/o AC Cable - Sheet 2 of 2

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 107


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 32. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) w/ AC Cable - Sheet 1 of 2

108 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 33. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) w/ AC Cable - Sheet 2 of 2

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 109


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 34. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing w/ AC Cable (AUS)

110 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 35. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing w/ AC Cable (AUS)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 111


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 36. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing w/o AC Cable

112 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 37. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing w/ AC Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 113


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 38. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) w/o AC Cable

114 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 39. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) w/ AC Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 115


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 40. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (Coil) w/o AC Cable

116 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 41. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (Coil) w/ AC Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 117


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 42. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) (Coil) w/o AC Cable

118 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 43. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) (Coil) w/ AC Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 119


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 44. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing (Coil) w/o AC Cable

120 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 45. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing (Coil) w/AC Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 121


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 46. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) (Coil) w/o AC Cable

122 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 47. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing (FTSW) (Coil) w/AC Cable

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 123


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 48. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1530L) - Cable Routing (Coil) w/ AC Cable (AUS)

124 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Chassis and Scissor Arms

Figure 49. Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L) - Cable Routing (Coil) w/ AC Cable (AUS)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 125


This Page is intentionally left blank

126
SECTION 4
BASIC HYDRAULIC INFORMATION AND SCHEMATICS

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
4.1 CYLINDERS - THEORY OF OPERATION ................................................................................................. 128
4.2 VALVES - THEORY OF OPERATION....................................................................................................... 128
4.2.1 Solenoid Control Valves (Bang-Bang).................................................................................. 128
4.2.2 Relief Valves.................................................................................................................... 128
4.2.3 Crossover Relief Valves ..................................................................................................... 128
4.2.4 Proportional Valve ........................................................................................................... 128
4.2.5 Flow Control Valve........................................................................................................... 128
4.3 PUMP/MOTOR ................................................................................................................................... 129
4.3.1 Pump Motor Electrical Evaluation....................................................................................... 129
4.3.2 Pump Components.......................................................................................................... 130
4.3.3 Hydraulic System Pressure Check Port ................................................................................ 131
4.3.4 Hydraulic System Pressure Settings .................................................................................... 131
4.3.5 Main Relief Adjustment .................................................................................................... 132
4.3.6 Steer Left Pressure Adjustment .......................................................................................... 133
4.3.7 Steer Right Pressure Adjustment........................................................................................ 133
4.3.8 Pump/Motor/Valve Assembly - Removal/Installation............................................................. 133
4.3.9 Motor Cover/Motor Installation.......................................................................................... 135
4.3.10 Preventative Maintenance - Brush Wear - Dust Removal Procedure......................................... 135
4.3.11 Motor Brush Installation ................................................................................................... 136
4.4 CYLINDER CHECKING PROCEDURE ...................................................................................................... 137
4.5 LIFT CYLINDER REMOVAL ................................................................................................................... 138
4.5.1 Lift Cylinder - LSS Pressure Sensor Location ......................................................................... 139
4.6 LIFT CYLINDER REPAIR ....................................................................................................................... 142
4.6.1 Disassembly.................................................................................................................... 142
4.6.2 Cleaning and Inspection ................................................................................................... 143
4.6.3 Assembly........................................................................................................................ 144
4.7 HYDRAULIC SCHEMATICS ................................................................................................................... 148

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 127


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

4.1 CYLINDERS - THEORY OF OPERATION

Cylinders are of the double acting type. The Lift and Steer systems incorporate double acting cylinders. A double acting cylinder is one
that requires oil flow to operate the cylinder rod in both directions. Directing oil (by actuating the corresponding control valve to the
piston side of the cylinder) forces the piston to travel toward the rod end of the barrel, extending the cylinder rod (piston attached to
rod). When the oil flow is stopped, movement of the rod will stop. By directing oil to the rod side of the cylinder, the piston will be
forced in the opposite direction and the cylinder rod will retract.

Note: The lift cylinder is a single acting cylinder which takes hydraulic pressure to extend and gravity to retract.

A holding valve is used in the hydraulic lift circuit to prevent motion unintended by the operator in the event of a hydraulic line failure.

4.2 VALVES - THEORY OF OPERATION

4.2.1 Solenoid Control Valves (Bang-Bang)


Control valves used are four-way, three-position solenoid valves of the sliding spool design. When a circuit is activated and the control
valve solenoid energizes, the spool is shifted and the corresponding work port opens to permit oil flow to the component in the
selected circuit, with the opposite work port opening to reservoir. Once the circuit is deactivated (control returned to neutral), the valve
spool returns to neutral (center) and oil flow is then directed through the valve body and returns to reservoir. A typical control valve
consists of the valve body, sliding spool, and two solenoid assemblies. The spool is machine fitted in the bore of the valve body. Lands
on the spool divide the bore into various chambers, which, when the spool is shifted, align with corresponding ports in the valve body
open to common flow. At the same time other ports would be blocked to flow. The spool is spring-loaded to center position, therefore
when the control is released, the spool automatically returns to neutral, prohibiting any flow through the circuit.

4.2.2 Relief Valves


Main relief valves are installed at various points within the hydraulic system to protect associated systems and components against
excessive pressure. Excessive pressure can be developed when a cylinder reaches its limit of travel and the flow of pressurized fluid
continues from the system control. The relief valve provides an alternate path for the continuing flow from the pump, thus preventing
rupture of the cylinder, hydraulic line or fitting. Complete failure of the system pump is also avoided by relieving circuit pressure. The
relief valve is installed in the circuit between the pump outlet (pressure line) and the cylinder of the circuit, generally as an integral part
of the system valve bank. Relief pressures are set slightly higher than the load requirement, with the valve diverting excess pump
delivery back to the reservoir when operating pressure of the component is reached.

4.2.3 Crossover Relief Valves


Crossover relief valves are used in circuits where the actuator requires an operating pressure lower than that supplied to the system.
When the circuit is activated and the required pressure at the actuator is developed, the crossover relief diverts excess pump flow to the
reservoir. Individual, integral relief’s are provided for each side of the circuit.

4.2.4 Proportional Valve


Flow is proportional to the amount of voltage supplied to the valve coil. Voltage is gained by the machine controller and determined by
the position of the joystick.

4.2.5 Flow Control Valve


The flow control valve is located on the top of the holding valve on the lift cylinder. The holding valve is a normally closed solenoid
valve, and holds the platform in place when raised. When activated, the valve opens to permit lift down. The holding valve is connected
to the manual descent valve, which is connected to a cable which, when pulled, manually opens the lift down port of the valve and
allows the platform to be lowered in the event hydraulic and/or electric power is lost.

128 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

4.3 PUMP/MOTOR

Theory of Operation
The Power Module is essentially a "low-side" switch for the pump motor. The positive terminal of the pump is tied to Battery Positive
after the Line Contactor. The negative terminal of the pump connects to the P Terminal of the Power Module, which switches current
through MOSFET transistors to the Battery Negative.
For variable speed pump operation, the MOSFET transistors switch On and Off at high frequencies. The Duty Cycle is varied to control
the voltage applied to the pump motor. When the MOSFET's spend 50% of the period On and 50% Off, approximately ½ of the available
Battery Voltage will be applied to the pump motor. Similarly, the MOSFET are On continuously (100% Duty Cycle) to apply all available
Battery Voltage to the pump motor (as in Lift Up at full speed).
When the Control System is energized, the voltage at the P Terminal will be approximately +24V (referenced to -B) when the pump is
static. The P Terminal will be approximately at +1V (referenced to -B) when the pump is running at full speed (Lift Up from Ground
Mode).

4.3.1 Pump Motor Electrical Evaluation


Several basic electrical tests can be performed on the Pump Motor. Failure of one of these evaluations is significant and may indicate
that the device is physically damaged.
Refer to Section — Resistance Measurement, page 202. Make all measurements with a voltmeter set to resistance scale (Ohms). Disconnect
main power at the batteries and all pump motor cables during this analysis.

• Resistance < 5 Ohms between Motor Terminals.


The internal windings are very low impedance and should appear to be a short-circuit for an ordinary voltmeter (other tests can
determine if the windings are truly shorted). High resistance can signal worn brushes, a faulty commutator, or open windings.

• Resistance > 1 Mega-Ohms between Motor Terminals and Motor Housing.


The internal windings should be electrically isolated from the motor housing. Low resistance may be an indication of a broken motor
terminal, damaged brush, faulty commutator, or burned winding.

Troubleshooting
The following difficulties can be examined using the JLG Analyzer, a voltmeter, and simple hand tools. Unless otherwise noted, the
Control System shall be energized in Ground Mode during testing. For a convenient Ground Reference, place the black meter lead on
the negative post of the left battery in the left-side batter compartment. The vehicle should be placed on a smooth, firm, and level
surface for all analysis.

1. Open-Circuit between +B Terminal and Pump Motor Positive Terminal


This issue will allow the vehicle to Lift Down, but Drive, Steer, and Lift Up will be lost and the Pump Motor will not Operate. Under
DIAGNOSTICS - PUMP, the JLG Analyzer will show PUMP PWM 100% and PUMP CUR 0.0A when Lift Up is operated from Ground
Mode.
As shown in the diagram, the voltage measured between the Pump Motor Positive Terminal and Ground Reference should be 24V.
If it is not, examine the cable between the terminal and the Power Module compartment. Inspect crimps for corrosion and ensure
that bolted connections are tight. Ensure that the cable is not crushed where it passes between the frame side sheets and the
cylinder assembly.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 129


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

2. Open-Circuit between Pump Motor Negative Terminal and P Terminal


This issue will allow the vehicle to Lift Down, but Drive, Steer, and Lift Up will be lost and the Pump Motor will not Operate. Under
DIAGNOSTICS - PUMP, the JLG Analyzer will show PUMP PWM 100% and PUMP CUR 0.0A when Lift Up is operated from Ground
Mode.
After ensuring there is not an Open-Circuit between the +B Terminal and Pump Motor Positive Terminal, check that the voltage
measured between the Pump Motor Negative Terminal and Ground Reference is 24V. If not, examine the issues within Open-
Circuit Pump Motor. This voltage should ramp to approximately 0V when Lift Up is operated from Ground Mode. If not, examine
the cable between the terminal and the Power Module compartment (P Terminal). Inspect crimps for corrosion and ensure that
bolted connections are tight. Ensure that the cable is not crushed where it passes between the frame side sheets and the cylinder
assembly.

3. Open-Circuit Pump Motor


This issue will allow the vehicle to Lift Down, but Drive, Steer, and Lift Up will be lost and the Pump Motor will not Operate. Under
DIAGNOSTICS - PUMP, the JLG Analyzer will show PUMP PWM 100% and PUMP CUR 0.0A when Lift Up is operated from Ground
Mode.
Disconnect main power at the batteries to completely de-energize the Control System. Next, detach the cable from Pump Motor
Positive Terminal. Using a voltmeter set for resistance measurement (Ohms), ensure that the resistance between the Pump Motor
Positive and Negative Terminals is less than 2 Ohms. If not, examine the pump motor for worn brushes or broken terminals. After
examination, re-connect the Pump Motor Positive Terminal and main power at the batteries.

4. Short-Circuit between Pump Motor Positive and Negative Terminals


This issue will allow the vehicle to Lift Down, but Drive, Steer, and Lift Up will be lost and the Pump Motor will not Operate. Under
DIAGNOSTICS - PUMP, the JLG Analyzer will show an erratic reading for PUMP PWM % and PUMP CUR will hover around 150A
when Lift Up is operated from Ground Mode.
Disconnect main power at the batteries to completely de-energize the Control System. Next, detach both Pump Motor Terminals
and insulate them independently. Re-connect main power at the batteries and re-try Lift Up. If the same symptoms persist (erratic
PUMP PWM%, PUMP CUR around 150A), examine the cabling between the Pump Motor and Power Module compartment for a
short-circuit (most likely near area where cylinder retracts between frame side sheets or near pothole mechanism, if equipped). If
the symptoms change, suspect a short-circuited (or mechanically frozen) pump motor.
A clamp-on ammeter (set for 200A DC) can be placed on either Pump Motor Cable for verification. During Lift Up, the ammeter will
read approximately 150A.

4.3.2 Pump Components


The following is a complete disassembly/assembly of the machines’ pump/motor/valve assembly.

Note: During reassembly of the pump/motor assembly, lubricate all seals and o-rings with JLG recommended hydraulic fluid.
Also keep all internal metal parts clean and coated with hydraulic fluid to prevent surface corrosion. JLG recommends replacing
all seals and o-rings when disassembling and reassembling the pump/ motor unit.

130 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

Figure 50. Hydraulic Pump - Hydraulic Line and Electrical Connections

1. Steer Right - Hyd. Line 6. Steer Right Solenoid

2. Steer Left - Hyd. Line 7. Steer Left Solenoid

3. Cyl. Lift-Up - Hyd. Line 8. Pump Motor Pos (+)

4. Cyl. Return - Hyd. Line 9. Pump Motor Neg (–)

5. Cylinder Lift-Up Solenoid

4.3.3 Hydraulic System Pressure Check Port


The port for hydraulic system lift pressure check is provided on the valve body of the hydraulic pump assembly as shown in the
following illustration.

1. Pump Valve Body 2. Pressure Check Port Shown with Optional Fitting

4.3.4 Hydraulic System Pressure Settings


Install a pressure gauge, capable of measuring 3000 psi at port “M” on the power unit. (Refer to Figure - Relief Pressure Setting Locations.)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 131


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

Figure 51. Relief Pressure Setting Locations

1. Pump Valve Body 5. Pressure Gauge Check Port

2. Steering Right Pressure Relief 6. Lift Up Valve

3. Steering Left Pressure Relief 7. Port “M”

4. Main Pressure Relief

Table 12. Hydraulic Pressure Settings


1330L/1530L PRESSURE SETTING
Main Relief Pressure 2530 ± 30 psi (174 ± 2 bar)
Main Relief Pressure (For JAPAN only) 2100 psi (145 bar)

Steer - Left/Right 1000 ± 30 psi (69 ± 2 bar)

Table 13. Coil Resistance


Component Coil Resistance

Lift-Up Solenoid 19 ohm


Steer - Left/Right Solenoid 28 ohm

4.3.5 Main Relief Adjustment


Method 1:

1. Connect a spare coil to lift up connector. Use a 13mm socket wrench to loosen the locknut on the main relief valve.

2. Lift up the machine, use a 4mm Allen wrench to adjust main relief valve (Refer to Figure - Relief Pressure Setting Locations.) until the
reading of the gauge show “2100 psi (145 bar) (For Japan only)” or “2530 psi (174 bar)” (For other market except for Japan).

3. Turning relief adjustment screw clockwise to increase the reading and Anti-clockwise to decrease the reading.

Note: DO NOT EXCEED MAXIMUM PRESSURE SETTINGS. Refer to Figure - Hydraulic Pump - Hydraulic Line and Electrical Connections.

Method 2:

1. Use a 13mm socket wrench to loosen the locknut on the main relief valve.

2. Lift up the machine fully and hold, use an Allen wrench to adjust the main relief valve (Refer to Figure - Relief Pressure Setting
Locations.) until the reading of the gauge show “2100 psi (145 bar) (For Japan only)” or “2530 psi (174 bar)” (For other market
except for Japan).

132 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

3. Turning relief adjustment screw clockwise to increase the reading and Anti-clockwise to decrease the reading.

4.3.6 Steer Left Pressure Adjustment


1. Use a 13mm socket wrench to loosen the locknut on the steer left adjust valve (Refer to Figure - Relief Pressure Setting Locations.),
steer left to the end and hold, use a 4mm Allen wrench to adjust the pressure until the reading show “1000 psi (69 bar)”.

2. Turning relief adjustment screw clockwise to increase the reading and Anti-clockwise to decrease the reading.

4.3.7 Steer Right Pressure Adjustment


1. Use a 13mm socket wrench to loosen the locknut on the steer right adjust valve(Refer to Figure - Relief Pressure Setting Locations.),
steer right to the end and hold, use a 4mm Allen wrench to adjust the pressure until the reading show “1000 psi (69 bar)”.

2. Turning relief adjustment screw clockwise to increase the reading and Anti-clockwise to decrease the reading.

4.3.8 Pump/Motor/Valve Assembly - Removal/Installation

1. Pump/Valve/Tank Assembly 4. Lift-Up/Return Hydraulic Lines

2. Pump Assy. Mounting Screw/Washers 5. Steer-Left/Right Hydraulic Lines

3. Valve Bank Solenoid Connections 6. Pump Motor Power Connection Terminals

Note: * Apply dielectric grease to terminals during installation of cables. Torque nuts to 18.4 ft. lb. (25 Nm).

CAUTION
Be certain the scissor is fully lowered before removing any hydraulic lines from the
pump unit. Wear protective gear when working around pressurized hydraulic lines.
Remove connections carefully and cap all lines.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 133


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

1. Disconnect machine electrical power using the quick disconnect on the left side batteries.

2. Disconnect the pump motor power cables from the power terminals on the side of the motor housing.

3. Label and then unplug the harness connectors from the lift-up, and steer solenoids on the pump valve bank assembly.

4. Label and carefully disconnect the hydraulic lines from the top of the valve bank assembly.

5. Remove the mounting screws (2) and washers from pump mounting plate under the pump and remove the pump/motor/valve
assembly from the machine.

Figure 52. Hydraulic Pump/Valve/Tank - Assembly

1. Manifold 9. Flow Control Valve 17. Suction Pipe


2. O-Ring 10. Plug 18. Suction Filter

3. Relief Valve 11. Seal Plug 19. Pipe For Return Filter
4. Spool Type Electric Valve 12. Coupling 20. Return Filter

5. Coil 13. Electric Motor 21. Tank


6. Auxiliary Port 14. Gear Pump 22. Valve Block

7. Seal 15. Seal 23. Screw


8. Plug 16. BSPP Connection

134 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

4.3.9 Motor Cover/Motor Installation

NOTICE
Disconnect the batteries before performing these procedures.

This procedure requires removing the pump to frame mounting bolts and nuts and rotating the pump assembly horizontally far enough
to allow removal of the pump motor cover. No pump connections, hydraulic or electrical need be disconnected.

Figure 53. Motor Cover/Motor Installation

1. Motor Assembly 3. Motor Assembly Screws

2. Motor Cover 4. Disassembly Marks

Note: * When reassembling, DO NOT OVERTIGHTEN motor assembly screws (3).


** Place marks on body to help with reassembly alignment.

4.3.10 Preventative Maintenance - Brush Wear - Dust Removal Procedure


Due to a possible build-up of dust from brush wear inside the pump motor cover around the brushes and armature under heavy usage.
It is recommended per the Section - Preventative Maintenance and Inspection Schedule , page 42, to perform this dust cleaning task on an
annual basis.
Follow the procedure show above for motor cover removal. Once the motor cover is removed, blow any accumulated brush dust from
inside the cover and around the brushes, and armature commutator. Check brushes for wear, replace if necessary. Once complete,
reassemble for operation, do not overtighten the motor cover bolts into the aluminum valve body.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 135


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

4.3.11 Motor Brush Installation


Once pump motor cover has been removed, inspect the rotor commutator for excessive wear before installing a new brush set.

Figure 54. Brush Installation

1. Brush Holder 4. Brush Tension Spring

2. Brush 5. Commutator on Armature


3. Brush Terminal Screw 6. Motor Cover Bearing

Installation the same for all four (4) brush assemblies.

Note: Clean the rotor commutator and brushes with a non-conductive electrical cleaner before assembly. Attach the brush terminal
end to the terminal post using the terminal screw (3), then push the brush (2) down into it’s holder (1), slide the tension spring
(4) onto the top of the brush.

After final assembly of the brushes check that all brush terminal screws are tight and the brush springs are positioned properly before
installing the motor cover and motor to the pump valve body.

NOTICE
Do not overtighten the pump motor assembly screws into the aluminum valve
body.

136 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

Figure 55. Hydraulic Hose Routing

1. Manifold Valve Block 3. Pump/Motor 5. Lift Cylinder

2. Oil Tank/Filter/Drain Plug 4. Steer Cylinder

4.4 CYLINDER CHECKING PROCEDURE

Note: Cylinder check must be performed anytime a system component is replaced or when improper system operation is suspected.

1. Using all applicable safety precautions, activate pump motor and fully extend cylinder to be checked.

2. Carefully disconnect hydraulic hoses from retract port of cylinder. There will be some initial weeping of hydraulic fluid which can
be caught in a suitable container. After the initial discharge, there should be no further drainage from the retract port.

3. Activate pump motor and extend cylinder.

4. If cylinder retract port leakage is less than 6-8 drops per minute, carefully reconnect hose to port and retract cylinder. If leakage
continues at a rate of 3 drops per minute or more, cylinder repair must be made.

Note: Steps 5 through 7 for Steer Cylinder Only.

5. With cylinder fully retracted, shut down machine power and carefully disconnect hydraulic hose from cylinder extend port.

6. Activate pump motor and retract cylinder. Check extend port for leakage.

7. If extend port leakage is less than 6-8 drops per minute, carefully reconnect hose to extend port, than activate cylinder through
one complete cycle and check for leaks. If leakage continues at a rate of 3 drops per minute or more, cylinder repairs must be
made.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 137


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

4.5 LIFT CYLINDER REMOVAL

Note: If there is a pump failure, a crane or a forktruck can be used to raise the platform.

WARNING
Never work under an elevated platform until it has been restrained from movement
with safety props, blocking, or overhead slings.

Self-locking fasteners, such as nylon insert and thread deforming locknuts, are not intended to be reinstalled after removal. Always use
new replacement hardware when installing locking fasteners.

1. Raise the platform and place on the safety prop. Use an overhead crane or fork truck to secure the platform and scissor arms
before lift cylinder removal begins. (Refer to Figure - Arms and Platform Positioning with Overhead Support).

2. Cut any wire ties that attach any cables or hoses to the lift cylinder.

NOTICE
Disconnect main power from the batteries before removing any components from
the lift cylinder assembly.

3. Remove the valve connector, the two hoses and the flow control cable from the cylinder.

Note: To avoid having to readjust the flow control valve, remove the large nut located behind the flow control valve bracket as
shown
Also (Refer to Figure - Scissor Arm Assembly (ES1330L - with LSS) - Pin Configuration, page 99 for lift cylinder mounting
hardware configurations.

4. Ensuring that the deck and scissor arms are properly secure, support the lift cylinder and remove the top lift cylinder pin and rest
the top of the cylinder on the arm cross tube directly below the cylinder.

5. Remove the bolt from the lower cylinder pin and have someone assist you in lifting the cylinder from the scissor arms.

6. Place the cylinder on a clean workbench.

138 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

4.5.1 Lift Cylinder - LSS Pressure Sensor Location


Lift cylinders on machines with the Load Sensing System (LSS) are equipped with a pressure sensing transducers. These sensors are
installed on the end side of the lift cylinder respectively.

Figure 56. LSS Pressure Sensor Location

1. Lift Cylinder 5. Pressure Sensor 2- (Torque to 14 ft. lb. (19 Nm))

2. Cylinder Valve Block 6. Sensor 2 - Harness Connector

3. Pressure Sensor 1- (Torque to 14 ft. lb. (19 Nm)) 7. Flow Control Valve and Release Cable
4. Sensor 1 - Harness Connector

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 139


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

Figure 57. Steer Cylinder

1. Cylinder Barrel 6. Wear Ring 11. Oil Port 16. O-Ring

2. Rod 7. O-Ring 12. Piston 17. Flanged Bearing

3. Gland 8. Backup Ring 13. Wear Ring

4. Rod Seal 9. O-Ring 14. Piston Seal


5. Wiper 10. Plug 15. Retaining Ring

140 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

1001236222-A

Figure 58. Lift Cylinder

1. Retaining Ring 6. Setscrew 11. Wear Ring 16. Rod Seal 21. Straight Fitting
2. Cylinder Barrel 7. Backup Ring 12. O-Ring 17. Piston Seal 22. Plug

3. Rod 8. Ball 13. O-Ring 18. Wiper


4. Piston 9. Wear Ring 14. O-Ring 19. Check Valve

5. Head 10. Bearing 15. Backup Ring 20. Manual Descent Valve

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 141


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

4.6 LIFT CYLINDER REPAIR

Note: The following are general procedures that apply to the cylinders on this machine. Procedures that apply to a specific cylinder will
be so noted.

4.6.1 Disassembly

NOTICE
Disassembly of the cylinder should be performed on a clean work surface in a dirt
free work area.

1. Connect a suitable auxiliary hydraulic power source to the port block fitting in the manifold located on the cylinder.

WARNING
Do not fully extend cylinder to the end of stroke. Retract cylinder slightly to avoid
trapping pressure.

2. Operate the hydraulic power source and extend the cylinder. Shut down and disconnect the power source. Adequately support
the cylinder rod, if applicable.

3. If applicable, remove the cartridge-type holding valve and fittings from the cylinder port block. Discard o-rings.

4. Place the cylinder barrel into a suitable holding fixture.

Figure 59. Cylinder Barrel Support

5. Mark cylinder head and barrel with a center punch for easy realignment. Loosen the cylinder head setscrew.

6. Using the proper wrench, loosen the cylinder head and remove head from cylinder barrel. When removing cylinder head do not
force if binding occurs. Reverse rotation a couple times and try removing again. If still no release, tap barrel with hammer in
threaded area, and try again. Repeat if necessary, until head is completely removed.

7. Attach a suitable pulling device to the cylinder rod port block end or cylinder rod end, as applicable.

NOTICE
Extreme care should be taken when removing the cylinder rod, head, and piston.
Avoid pulling the rod off-center, which could cause damage to the piston and
cylinder barrel surfaces.

142 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

8. With the barrel clamped securely, apply pressure to the rod pulling device and carefully withdraw the complete rod assembly from
the cylinder barrel.

Figure 60. Cylinder Rod Support

9. Using suitable protection, clamp the cylinder rod in a vise or similar holding fixture as close to the piston as possible.

10. Loosen and remove the cap screw(s), if applicable, which attach the tapered bushing to the piston.

11. Insert the cap screw(s) in the threaded holes in the outer piece of the tapered bushing. Progressively tighten the cap screw(s) until
the bushing is loose on the piston.

12. Remove the bushing from the piston.

13. Screw the piston CCW, by hand, and remove the piston from cylinder rod.

14. Remove and discard the piston o-rings, seal rings, and backup rings.

15. If applicable, remove the piston spacer from the rod.

16. Remove the rod from the holding fixture. Remove the cylinder head gland and retainer plate, if applicable. Discard the o-rings,
back-up rings, rod seals, and wiper seals.

4.6.2 Cleaning and Inspection


1. Clean all parts thoroughly in an approved cleaning solvent.

2. Inspect the cylinder rod for scoring, tapering, ovality, or other damage. If necessary, dress rod with Scotch Brite or equivalent.
Replace rod if necessary.

3. Inspect threaded portion of rod for excessive damage. Dress threads as necessary.

4. Inspect inner surface of cylinder barrel tube for scoring or other damage. Check inside diameter for tapering or ovality. Replace if
necessary.

5. Inspect threaded portion of barrel for damage. Dress threads as necessary.

6. Inspect piston surface for damage and scoring and for distortion. Dress piston surface or replace piston as necessary.

7. Inspect threaded portion of piston for damage. Dress threads as necessary.

8. Inspect seal and o-ring grooves in piston for burrs and sharp edges. Dress applicable surfaces as necessary.

9. Inspect cylinder head inside diameter for scoring or other damage and for ovality and tapering. Replace as necessary.

10. Inspect threaded portion of head for damage. Dress threads as necessary.

11. Inspect seal and o-ring grooves in head for burrs and sharp edges. Dress applicable surfaces as necessary.

12. Inspect cylinder head outside diameter for scoring or other damage and ovality and tapering. Replace as necessary.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 143


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

13. If applicable, inspect rod and barrel bearings for signs of correct excessive wear or damage. Replace as necessary.
a. Thoroughly clean hole, (steel bushing) of burrs, dirt etc. to facilitate bearing installation.
b. Inspect steel bushing for wear or other damage. If steel bushing is worn or damaged, rod/barrel must be replaced.
c. Lubricate inside of steel bushing with WD40 prior to bearing installation.
d. Using an arbor of the correct size, carefully press the bearing into steel bushing.

Note: Install pin into the Gar-Max bearing dry. Lubrication is not required with nickel plated pins and bearings.

Figure 61. Gar-Max Bearing Installation

14. Inspect travel limiting collar or spacer for burrs and sharp edges. If necessary, dress inside diameter surface with Scotch Brite or
equivalent.

15. If applicable, inspect port block fittings and holding valve. Replace as necessary.

16. Inspect the oil ports for blockage or the presence of dirt or other foreign material. Repair as necessary.

17. If applicable, inspect piston rings for cracks or other damage. Replace as necessary.

4.6.3 Assembly

Note: Prior to cylinder assembly, ensure that the proper cylinder seal kit is used. See your JLG Parts Manual for these machine models.

Apply a light film of hydraulic oil to all components prior to assembly.

1. A special tool is used to install a new rod seal into the applicable cylinder head gland groove.

Figure 62. Rod Seal Installation

NOTICE
When installing ‘poly-pak’ piston seals, ensure seals are installed properly. Refer to
wiper seal installation for correct seal orientation. Improper seal installation could
result in cylinder leakage and improper cylinder operation.

144 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

2. Use a soft mallet to tap a new wiper seal into the applicable cylinder head gland groove. Install a new wear ring into the applicable
cylinder head gland groove.

Figure 63. Poly-Pak Piston Seal Installation

Figure 64. Wiper Seal Installation

3. Place a new O-ring and back-up seal in the applicable outside diameter groove of the cylinder head.

Figure 65. Installation of Head Seal Kit

4. Install washer ring onto rod, carefully install the head gland on the rod, ensuring that the wiper and rod seals are not damaged or
dislodged. Push the head along the rod to the rod end, as applicable.

5. If applicable, correctly place new o-ring in the inner piston diameter groove. (The backup ring side facing the O-ring is grooved.)

6. If applicable, correctly place new seals and guide lock rings in the outer piston diameter groove. (A tube, with I.D. slightly larger
than the O.D. of the piston is recommended to install the solid seal.)

Note: The backup rings for the solid seal have a radius on one side. This side faces the solid seal.(Refer to magnified insert in Figure
- Installation of Head Seal Kit, page 145. The split of seals and backup rings are to be positioned so as not to be in alignment
with each other.

7. Using suitable protection, clamp the cylinder rod in a vise or similar holding fixture as close to piston as possible.

8. Carefully thread the piston on the cylinder rod hand tight, ensuring that the o-ring and back-up rings are not damaged or
dislodged.

9. Thread the piston onto the rod until it abuts the spacer end and install the tapered bushing.

Note: When installing the tapered bushing, piston and mating end of rod must be free of oil.

10. Assemble the tapered bushing loosely into the piston and insert JLG capscrews (not vendor capscrews) through the drilled holes
in the bushing and into the tapped holes in the piston.

11. Tighten the capscrews evenly and progressively in rotation to the specified torque value.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 145


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

12. After the screws have been torqued, tap the tapered bushing with a hammer (16 to 24 oz.) and brass shaft (approximately 3/4 in.
diameter) as follows;
a. Place the shaft against the cylinder rod and in contact with the bushing in the spaces between the capscrews.
b. Tap each space once; this means the tapered bushing is tapped 3 times as there are 3 spaces between the capscrews.

13. Retorque the capscrews evenly and progressively in rotation to the specified torque value.

14. Remove the cylinder rod from the holding fixture.

15. Place new guide locks and seals in the applicable outside diameter grooves of the cylinder piston.

16. Position the cylinder barrel in a suitable holding fixture.

NOTICE
Extreme care should be taken when installing the cylinder rod, head, and piston.
Avoid pulling the rod off-center, which could cause damage to the piston and
cylinder barrel surfaces.

17. With the barrel clamped securely, and while adequately supporting the rod, insert the piston end into the barrel cylinder. Ensure
that the piston loading o-ring and seal ring are not damaged or dislodged.

18. Continue pushing the rod into the barrel until the cylinder head gland can be inserted into the barrel cylinder.

19. Secure the cylinder head gland using the washer ring and socket head bolts.

Figure 66. Rod Assembly Installation

20. After the cylinder has been reassembled, the rod should be pushed all the way in (fully retracted) prior to the reinstallation of any
holding valve or valves.

21. If applicable, install the cartridge-type holding valve and fittings in the rod port block, using new o-rings as applicable.

22. Push the piston onto the rod until it abuts the spacer end and install the attaching nut.

WARNING
When rebuilding the cylinders, apply medium-high strength threadlocking
compound to the piston nut, then torque piston nut. Refer to applicable cylinder
illustration for torque requirement.

23. Remove the cylinder rod from the holding fixture.

146 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

24. Position the cylinder barrel in a suitable holding fixture.

NOTICE
Extreme care should be taken when installing the cylinder rod, head, and piston.
Avoid pulling the rod off-center, which could cause damage to the piston and
cylinder barrel surfaces.

25. With barrel clamped securely, and while adequately supporting the rod, insert the piston end into the barrel cylinder. Ensure that
the piston loading o-ring and seal ring are not damaged or dislodged.

26. Continue pushing the rod into the barrel until the cylinder head gland can be inserted into the barrel cylinder.

27. If applicable, secure the cylinder head retainer using a suitable chain wrench.

28. After the cylinder has been reassembled, the rod should be pushed all the way in (fully retracted) prior to the reinstallation of any
holding valve or valves.

29. If applicable, install the cartridge-type holding valve and fittings in the port block using new o-rings as applicable. (Refer to Figure -
Lift Cylinder, page 141.)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 147


4.7

148
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

OPTIONAL LSS
WHEEL DRIVE
P
OPTIONAL LSS U
WHEEL DRIVE SCISSOR PUMP
3.2 CC/REV
LIFT CYLINDER DISPLACEMENT
P MAIN 175 BAR
D U RELIEF (2538 PSI) D
MAIN RELIEF 145 BAR
(JAPAN ONLY) (2100 PSI)
A1 PORT 69 BAR
1.6mm
ORIFICE RELIEF (1000 PSI)
A2 PORT 69 BAR
RELIEF (1000 PSI)
HYDRAULIC SCHEMATICS

LIFT CYL
60 MM
BORE
2mm LIFT CYL
MACHINED 40 MM
ORIFICE
ROD
LIFT CYL 713 MM (1530)
V1 V2 STROKE 657 MM (1330)
STEER CYL
60 MM
BORE
Basic Hydraulic Information and Schematics

C STEER CYL C
T1 PORT STEER CYLINDER 35 MM
A PORT ROD
LIFT UP P1 3/8 in. BSPP LIFT DOWN
( SAE - 6 JIC) (SAE - 6 JIC)
STEER RELIEF STEER CYL
SET AT 69 BAR 160 MM
STROKE

300 MICRON
A1 PORT
STEER CYL ROD
(SAE - 4 JIC)

2X 300 MICRON

A2 PORT
VED - 81 - 43 - 06 - CC STEER CYL BASE

31217455
(SAE - 4 JIC)

A B

STEER RELIEF
SET AT 69 BAR
B A B T B

V4D - CEI - 2P

Figure 67. Hydraulic Schematic


0.5 mm

M
1/4 in. BSPP
VMP12
175 BAR
(145 BAR
FOR JAPAN) 20 MICRON WITH
1.5 BAR BYPASS

P T T1

M 3.15 CC
A A
2.2 KW
250 MICRON

TANK CAPACITY 5L

1001237712-D
8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1

MAF53580D

ES1330L, ES1530L
SECTION 5
JLG CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
5.1 HAND HELD ANALYZER ...................................................................................................................... 150
5.1.1 Diagnostic Port................................................................................................................ 150
5.1.2 To Connect the Hand Held Analyzer ................................................................................... 150
5.1.3 Using the Analyzer........................................................................................................... 152
5.1.4 Changing the Access Level of the Hand Held Analyzer .......................................................... 153
5.1.5 Adjusting Parameters Using the Hand Held Analyzer ............................................................ 155
5.1.6 Machine Setup ................................................................................................................ 155
5.2 JOYSTICK CALIBRATION ..................................................................................................................... 156
5.3 TILT SENSOR CALIBRATION ................................................................................................................ 157
5.3.1 Tilt Sensor Failure Troubleshooting .................................................................................... 157
5.4 ROTARY ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION ............................................................................................... 158
5.5 FACTORY RESET................................................................................................................................. 158
5.6 UPDATING SOFTWARE ....................................................................................................................... 159
5.7 MACHINE CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING INFORMATION................................................................. 166
5.8 MACHINE MODEL ADJUSTMENT (PERSONALITY SETTINGS) .................................................................. 168

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 149


JLG Control System

5.1 HAND HELD ANALYZER

Figure 68. Hand Held Analyzer

5.1.1 Diagnostic Port


To connect the Hand Held Analyzer, the diagnostic port plug (1) is located in the wiring harness close to the machine controller logic
module (2), inside the right side compartment door, refer to Figure - Diagnostic Port Location, page 151.

5.1.2 To Connect the Hand Held Analyzer


1. Connect the four pin end of the cable supplied with the analyzer, to the diagnostic port plug and connect the remaining end of
the cable to the analyzer.

Note: The cable has a four pin connector at each end of the cable; the cable cannot be connected backwards.

2. Power up the control system by turning the ground control station - platform/ground selector switch - to the platform position
and pulling both platform and ground control emergency stop buttons on.

150 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

Figure 69. Diagnostic Port Location

1. Diagnostic Port 2. Logic Module

(Some components are hidden for clarity in illustrations.)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 151


JLG Control System

5.1.3 Using the Analyzer


With the machine power on and the analyzer connected properly, the analyzer will display the following:

HELP:
PRESS ENTER
At this point, using the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys, you can move between the top level menu items. To select a displayed menu item,
press ENTER. To cancel a selected menu item, press ESC; then you will be able to scroll using the right and left arrow keys to select a
different menu item.
The top level menus are as follows:
HELP
DIAGNOSTICS
SYSTEM TEST
ACCESS LEVEL
PERSONALITIES
MACHINE SETUP
CALIBRATION
If you press ENTER, at the HELP: PRESS ENTER display, and a fault is present, the analyzer display will scroll the fault across the screen. If
more than one fault is present only the highest priority fault will show. The other active faults are viewable in Logged Help. If there was
no fault detected, the display will read:
In platform mode,
HELP: (001)
EVERYTHING OK,
In ground mode,
HELP: (002)
GROUND MODE OK
If ENTER is pressed again, the display moves to the following display:

152 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

LOG: (211)
1: Power Cycle (Or last recorded fault)
At this point, the analyzer will display the highest priority active fault, if any are present. You may scroll through the fault logs to view
what the last fifteen faults were. Use the right and left arrow keys to scroll through the fault logs. The active faults, are listed before the
first POWER CYCLE. To return to the top menu, press ESC two times. When a top level menu is selected, a new set of menu items may be
offered; If for example you choose Personalities:
DRIVE
LIFT
STEER
GROUND
Pressing ENTER with any of the above displayed menus, will display additional sub-menus within the selected menu. In some cases the
next level is the parameter or information to be changed. Refer to the flow chart for what menus are available within the top level
menus. You may only view the personality settings for selected menus while in access level 2. Remember, you may always cancel a
selected menu item by pressing the ESC key.

5.1.4 Changing the Access Level of the Hand Held Analyzer


When the analyzer is first connected, you will be in access level 2 which enables you to only view most configuration settings which
cannot be changed until you enter a password to advance to a lower level. This ensures that a setting cannot be accidentally altered. To
change the access level, the correct password must be entered. To enter the password, scroll to the ACCESS LEVEL menu.
For example:

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 153


JLG Control System

MENU:
ACCESS LEVEL 2
Press ENTER to select the ACCESS LEVEL menu.
Using the UP or DOWN arrow keys, enter the first digit of the password, 3.
Then using the RIGHT arrow key, position the cursor to the right one space to enter the second digit of the password.
Use the UP or DOWN arrow key to enter the second digit of the password which is 3.
Repeat this process until you have entered all five digits of the password which is 33271.
Once the correct password is displayed, press ENTER. The access level should display the following, if the password was entered
correctly:

MENU:
ACCESS LEVEL 1
Repeat the above steps if the correct access level is not displayed or you can not adjust the personality settings:

154 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

5.1.5 Adjusting Parameters Using the Hand Held Analyzer


Once you have gained access to level 1, and a personality item is selected, press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to adjust its value, for
example:

PERSONALITIES:
DRIVE ACCEL 0.7s
There will be a minimum and maximum for the value to ensure efficient operation. The Value will not increase if the UP arrow is pressed
when at the maximum value nor will the value decrease if the DOWN arrow is pressed and the value is at the minimum value for any
particular personality. If the value does not change when pressing the up and down arrows, check the access level to ensure you are at
access level 1.

5.1.6 Machine Setup


When a machine digit item is selected, press the UP or DOWN arrow keys to adjust its value, for example:

WARNING
Failure to make the proper settings for the particular machine can result in
improper operation.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 155


JLG Control System

GROUND ALARM:
1=DESCENT
The effect of the machine digit value is displayed along with its value. The above display would be selected if the machine was equipped
with a ground alarm and you wanted it to sound when driving. There are certain settings allowed to install optional features or select
the machine model.
When selecting the machine model to match the size of the machine, the personality settings will return to default settings.

Note: Refer to Table - Machine Model Adjustment (Personality Settings) - Version P1.14.1, page 168; and Table — Machine Configuration
Programming Information - Version P1.14.1, page 166 for the default settings.
Password 33271 will give you access to level 1, which will permit you to change all machine personality and/or machine setup
settings.

WARNING
Changing these settings may adversely affect the performance of your machine.

5.2 JOYSTICK CALIBRATION

The joystick calibration should be completed if the joystick is replaced. To perform the joystick calibration both emergency stop switches
must be pulled out (reset) and the ground control keyswitch set on platform mode.

1. Plug the analyzer into the machine, “Help Press Enter” should be displayed on the analyzer display.

2. Press the right arrow key to “Access Level 2".

3. Press Enter once. At this screen, you are asked to enter a password: Enter “33271” by doing the following:
a. Using the up and down key enter the first number.
b. Right arrow key once and enter the next number.
c. Repeat steps A and B until you have entered “33271” and press Enter.
d. Access level 1 should be on the display.

4. Press right arrow key to “Calibrations” and press Enter once.

5. “Calibration: Joystick” should appear, press Enter once

6. “Cal Joystick: Yes: Enter, No: Esc” should appear, press Enter once.

7. “Cal Joystick: Fwd to Max” will appear. Move joystick completely forward and hold, then press Enter.

8. “Cal Joystick: Center” will appear. Release joystick to the neutral position and press Enter.

156 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

9. “Cal Joystick: Rev to Max” will appear. move joystick completely in the reverse position and hold, then press Enter.

10. “Cal Joystick: Complete” will appear. Power down the machine.

5.3 TILT SENSOR CALIBRATION

Be sure that the machine is parked and stowed on level ground.

Note: Tilt Sensor Calibration can not be performed if the main contactor switch is open due to an alarm.

1. Enter Access Level 1 and go to the CALIBRATION/ TILT SENSOR/LEVEL VEHICLE screen.

2. Choose the right arrow key to view the raw, uncalibrated tilt sensor values. If either raw angle reads 5.0 or more, the machine is
too unlevel and the software will prohibit calibration. Therefore, attempt to dissect the three areas of error to find the primary
contributor:
a. Machine mounting and/or grade: Try to measure the top of the tilt sensor for levelness. If unable to get a good reading,
unbolt the tilt sensor and check the sensor’s mounting surface for levelness.
b. Observe whether the tilt sensor is properly seated.
c. Tilt sensor has developed an offset shift: Keep the tilt sensor electrically connected. Level one axis of the tilt sensor and
observe the raw reading (should be within ± 2.0). Do the same for the other axis. If either axis is greater than ± 2.0, replace the
tilt sensor.

Note: Check that the tilt switch is properly set by referring to the Section - Tilt Switch Activation, page 16 of this manual.

5.3.1 Tilt Sensor Failure Troubleshooting


Some possible reasons that the tilt sensor will not calibrate are:

1. The surface the machine is sitting on is off level by a few degrees (flat doesn’t imply level; parking lots are often not level).

2. The tilt sensor has failed one or both of the channels (X axis and Y axis).

3. Tilt sensor has moisture intrusion that has shifted its output.

4. Water and/or corrosion in the sensor has corrupted electrical connections or caused a tilt sensor failure (observe any cracks in the
housing).

For the following troubleshooting steps, a bubble level (smaller is better) will be needed and the machine must be on a level surface:

1. If the Analyzer displays angles other than +20.0°, attempt to calibrate. If machine won’t calibrate, note the reason displayed on
Analyzer:
a. SENSOR FAILURE – tilt sensor internal frequency is out of range (replace sensor).
b. NOT LEVEL - tilt sensor has either developed an offset or it is too unlevel as mounted on the machine

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 157


JLG Control System

5.4 ROTARY ANGLE SENSOR CALIBRATION

Note: If this calibration is performed, LSS calibration will be erased. Recalibrate the LSS refer to Section - LSS (Load Sensing System), page
172 Service.

NOTICE
Machine must be on level ground before elevation sensor can be set.

1. Be sure that the machine is parked and platform stowed on level ground.

2. Attach the analyzer near the ground control station.

3. Go to Access Level 1 and scroll through to CALIBRATION.

4. Under CALIBRATION, go to SET STOW ELEV.

5. Press ENTER for YES to set the stowed height for the elevation sensor.

6. Fully raise the platform.

7. Under CALIBRATION, go to SET MAX ELEV.

8. Press ENTER for YES to set the maximum height for the elevation sensor.

Note: Check the sensor by lifting the scissor arms, from the platform, and driving until the drive speed cuts back. Refer to High Drive
Speed Cutback, page 17 in Section 1 for proper speed cut out height.

5.5 FACTORY RESET

The CALIBRATIONS to FACTORY RESET shall be used to reset all sections of EEPROM excluding logged operating hours from On-Board
Data Logging.

MENU SUBMENU COMMENTS


ERASE MACHINE CALIBRATIONS? The technician is notified of items to be erased and continues by pressing ENTER, or leave
by pressing ESC.
CALIBRATIONS: FACTORY RESET?
The technician chooses to erase the vehicle calibrations by pressing enter again or
CLEAR CALS YES:ERASE;NO:ESC
escaping the sequence.

158 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

5.6 UPDATING SOFTWARE

Software updates are available via OLE (Online Express). Navigate to the website and follow the instructions for to download software
updates.

Note: Select Market as CE for UKCA specification machine on Analyzer.

Figure 70. Analyzer Software P1.14.1 - Sheet 1 of 7

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 159


JLG Control System

Figure 71. Analyzer Software P1.14.1 - Sheet 2 of 7

160 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

Figure 72. Analyzer Software P1.14.1 - Sheet 3 of 7

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 161


JLG Control System

Figure 73. Analyzer Software P1.14.1 - Sheet 4 of 7

162 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

Figure 74. Analyzer Software P1.14.1 - Sheet 5 of 7

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 163


JLG Control System

Figure 75. Analyzer Software P1.14.1 - Sheet 6 of 7

164 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

Figure 76. Analyzer Software P1.14.1 - Sheet 7 of 7

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 165


JLG Control System

5.7 MACHINE CONFIGURATION PROGRAMMING INFORMATION

Note: 1. When configuring a scissor machine, the machine configuration programming must be completed before any personality settings can be changed, refer to Table —
Machine Model Adjustment (Personality Settings) - Version P1.14.1., page 168). Changing the personality settings first and then changing the model number of the
machine configuration will cause the personality settings to return to default value.
2. Solid shaded entries are not available for the selected Market.
3. Select Market as CE for UKCA specification machine on Analyzer.

Table 14. Machine Configuration Programming Information - Version P1.14.1

Configuration Market Default Setting


Setting Description
Digit
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 ES1530L
MODEL 2 ES1530LC
3 ES1330L
1 ANSI USA
2 ANSI EXPORT
3 CSA
4 CE
MARKET
5 AUS
6 JPN
7 GB
8 KOREA
1 NO – Vehicle is not configured with Drive cutout when elevated
DRIVE CUTOUT 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
2 YES - Vehicle is configured with Drive cutout when elevated.

1 DRIVE ONLY - Drive motion prevented while vehicle is charging.


CHARGER 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
INTERLOCK DRIVE AND LIFT UP - Drive and lift up motions are prevented while vehicle is charging. Required for CE.
2

1 MOTION - Ground Alarm sounds during Lift Up, Lift Down, Drive Forward, or Drive Reverse.

GROUND ALARM 2 HORN ONLY - Ground Alarm only sounds when user presses Platform Horn button. 1 1 1 2 1 1 2 1

3 DESCENT - Ground Alarm sounds during Lift Down.

1 NO - Load Sensing System (LSS) is not fitted to the vehicle.

CUTOUT PLTM - Load Sensing System (LSS) is fitted, and Platform Controls are prevented in the event
LOAD 2 2 2 2 3 3 2 3 2
of an Overload. Ground Controls remain functional.
CUTOUT ALL - Load Sensing System (LSS) is fitted. Platform and Ground Controls are prevented in the
3
event of an Overload.
1 FLOODED - Batteries are conventional lead-acid type.
BATTERY 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 AGM - Batteries are absorbed glass mat type.

1 YES - Optional beacon is present.


BEACON 2 2 2 1 2 2 1 2
2 NO - Optional beacon not present.
LOW TEMP YES - Low temp cutout is active. 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2
1
CUTOUT

166 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

Table 14. Machine Configuration Programming Information - Version P1.14.1 (continued)

Configuration Market Default Setting


Setting Description
Digit 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
2 NO - Low temp cutout is not active.

WHT. NOISE 1 NO - Vehicle does not have the white noise alarm.
1 1 1 1 2 1 1 1
ALARM 2 YES - Vehicle has the white noise alarm.
1 NO - Vehicle is not configured with PHP Alarm when Pothole bar is blocked.
PHP ALARM 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
2 YES - Vehicle is configured with PHP Alarm when Pothole bar is blocked.

1 NO - Vehicle is not configured with Overhead Protection Sensors.


OVRHEAD 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1
PROTECT 2 YES - Vehicle is configured with Overhead Protection Sensors.
1001249838-B

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 167


JLG Control System

5.8 MACHINE MODEL ADJUSTMENT (PERSONALITY SETTINGS)

Table 15. Machine Model Adjustment (Personality Settings) - Version P1.14.1


Adjustment Adjustment Range ES1330L ES1530L
DRIVE
ACCEL 0.1 - 5.0 (sec) 1.5 1.5
DECEL 0.2 - 2.0 0.8 0.8
MINIMUM 1- 25% 1 1
MAXIMUM 26-100% 100 100
Elev. Max 0-50% 18 18
STEER
ACCEL 0.1 - 5(sec) 0.1 0.1
DECEL 0.1 - 1.0 (sec) 0.1 0.1
MIN 1 - 25% 1 1
MAX 26 - 100% 41 41
LIFT
ACCEL 0.1 - 5.0 (sec) 0.7 0.7
DECEL 0.1 - 1.0 (sec) 0.1 0.1
UP MIN 1 - 45% 20 20
UP STOP 1 - 100% 55 55
UP MAX 31 - 100% 69 69
UP CREEP 1 - 100% 50 50
DN MIN 250 - 350 mA 280 280
DN S-STOP 250 - 1200 mA 300 300
DN MAX 351 - 1200 mA 700 700
DN EARM 250 - 1200 mA 370 370
DN CREEP 250 - 1200 mA 300 300
JOYSTICK
FWD MIN 1.95 - 2.45 V 2.20 2.20
FWD MAX 0.94 - 1.44 V 1.19 1.19
REV MIN 2.59 - 3.09 V 2.84 2.84
REV MAX 3.53 - 4.03 V 3.78 3.78
GROUND
HORN 1 - 100% 94 94
ALARM 1 - 100% 25 25
LOAD
OVERLOAD DEBOUNCE 0.5 - 5.0 (sec) 0.6 0.6
OVERLOAD HOLD 0.5 - 5.0 (sec) 5.0 5.0
ACC’Y 0 - 200 kg 0 0

168 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


JLG Control System

Table 15. Machine Model Adjustment (Personality Settings) - Version P1.14.1 (continued)
Adjustment Adjustment Range ES1330L ES1530L
TEMP CUTOUT
CUTOUT SET -18°C to 0°C -18 -18
1001249839 -A

Note: These settings may change in order to achieve optimal performance on a machine by machine basis.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 169


This Page is intentionally left blank

170
SECTION 6
LSS LOAD SENSING SYSTEM SERVICE

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
6.1 LSS (LOAD SENSING SYSTEM) ............................................................................................................. 172
6.1.1 Theory of Operation......................................................................................................... 172
6.1.2 Personalities Menu........................................................................................................... 173
6.1.3 Diagnostic Menu ............................................................................................................. 174
6.1.4 Calibration Preparation..................................................................................................... 175
6.1.5 Empty Platform Calibration ............................................................................................... 176
6.1.6 Loaded Platform Calibration.............................................................................................. 176
6.1.7 LSS Verification ............................................................................................................... 177
6.1.8 Partial Height Calibration .................................................................................................. 177
6.1.9 Testing........................................................................................................................... 177
6.1.10 LSS Connector Pin Assignments......................................................................................... 178
6.1.11 LSS Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 179

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 171


LSS Load Sensing System Service

6.1 LSS (LOAD SENSING SYSTEM)

6.1.1 Theory of Operation


The Load Sensing System (LSS) is designed to measure platform load and prevent overload situations. The system consists of pressure
sensors on the lift cylinder, an rotatory angle sensor, and the control module.
For vehicles with a single lift cylinder, a dual-channel pressure sensor with current output is mounted on the lift cylinder to measure
head pressure. The primary feedback is scaled 0-3626 PSI as 4-20 mA. The backup feedback is scaled 3626-0 PSI as 20-4 mA. A single
channel pressure with voltage output is mounted on the lift cylinder to measure rod pressure. The rod feedback is scaled 0-1450 PSI as
0.5-4.5 V. The pressures are combined with geometric information about the lift cylinder to calculate the net lift cylinder force. The
primary and backup channels of the lift cylinder head pressure transducer are continuously compared to detect sensor integrity issues.
The rotatory angle sensor is used to estimate platform height based on lower arm angle. The calibration process teaches the control
system the feedback voltage for the stowed and fully elevated positions. The feedback voltage and calibration information are combine
with geometric information to calculate the platform height.
The LSS can be calibrated in the field without test weights using the procedure within the CALIBRATIONS ' LOAD 0% menu. The
procedure allows the control system to measure net lift cylinder force at a variety of platform heights while lifting up and down with an
empty platform. Once the force profile is validated, the control system uses geometric information to calculate the remaining calibration
information for a loaded platform. Vehicles calibrated with this method may experience a slight capacity reduction (10% to 20%) but
remain regulatory compliant. The control system will flash the Ground Overload Indicator twice at power-up to indicate LSS has been
calibrated without test weights (refer to DIAGNOSTICS ' LOAD ' 110% CAL).
The LSS can be calibrated to maximum accuracy in the service center with test weights using the procedure within the CALIBRATIONS '
LOAD 110% menu. This procedure should be executed after CALIBRATIONS ' LOAD 0%. The procedure allows the control system to
replace the calculated calibration information with measured net lift cylinder forces while lifting up and down with a loaded platform.
If the vehicle must be calibrated in a situation with restrictive ceiling height, the LSS will accept a partial height calibration. The platform
should be lifted as close as practical to the ceiling when prompted to LIFT TO MAX ELEV. The control system will automatically restrict lift
up to the demonstrated platform height until the system is re-calibrated to full height in the future.
The LSS can be periodically verified without test weights to extend calibration intervals. The procedure within the CALIBRATIONS '
VERIFY LOAD menu allows the control system to confirm net lift cylinder forces against calibration information at a variety of platform
heights while lifting up and down with an empty platform. The control system will indicate PASS if the measured forces compare within
a tight tolerance to the calibration information, and FAIL otherwise. Verification automatically restricts lift up if the vehicle is calibrated in
a situation with restrictive ceiling height.
During operation, the control system measures platform load while platform height is 10% to 90% of maximum height. The system
functions in this manner to avoid abnormalities caused by deployment of the pothole system and maximum extension of the lift
cylinder.
The control system provides a mechanism to ignore instantaneous changes in friction and avoid spurious overloads. Measured platform
load must be greater than the capacity limit for a period that exceeds the PERSONALITIES ' LOAD ' OVR DBNCE (seconds) setting before
the LSS indicates an overload. Once an overload has occurred, measured platform load must be less than the capacity limits for a period
that exceeds the PERSONALITIES ' LOAD ' OVR HOLD (seconds) setting before the LSS indicates no overload.
Accessories mounted in the platform have an impact on the LSS capacity limit. The PERSONALITY ' LOAD ' ACC'Y (KG) setting is used to
account for accessories by reducing the capacity limit. The control system will manage accessories properly when the LOAD ' ACC'Y
setting is adjusted prior to LSS calibration according to the documentation furnished with the factory-provided accessories. Light-weight
accessories like optional lighting or foot-switches do not impact the LSS capacity limit and the LOAD ' ACC'Y setting should be set to
zero. Accessories like the Electrician's Tree reduce the LSS capacity limit according to their weight and the LOAD ' ACC'Y setting must be
set to account for their total weight. Finally, accessories like the Panel Carrier induce wind loading on the vehicle and reduce the LSS
capacity limit by more than their weight and the LOAD ' ACC'Y setting must be to the values recommended by JLG. Follow the
documentation furnished with factory-provided accessories when fitting more than one accessory to a vehicle or consult JLG.

172 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


LSS Load Sensing System Service

Figure 77. LSS Component Locations

1.Rotatory Angle Sensor 3.Rod Pressure Sensor

2.Head Pressure Sensor

6.1.2 Personalities Menu


The following parameter in the PERSONALITIES, LOAD menu adjust performance of the LSS. All adjustments must be made in Access
Level 1 (33271).

Table 16. Personalities Menu Description


SUBMENU (Displayed on Analyzer 1st line) PARAMETER (Displayed on Analyzer 2nd Line) DESCRIPTION

LOAD: OVR DBNCE: 0.3 S This parameter sets the debounce time (in sec- onds) where
platform load must be greater than the capacity limit before
triggering over- load
OVR HOLD: 5.0 S This parameter sets the minimum hold time (in seconds)
where plat- form load must be less than the capacity limit
before releasing over- load.
ACC'Y: 0 KG This parameter reduces the capacity limit for permanently
mounted platform accessories.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 173


LSS Load Sensing System Service

6.1.3 Diagnostic Menu


The Diagnostic Load menu's are another troubleshooting tool for the Load Sensing System. Sensor and status information is presented
in real-time for the technician.
To access the Diagnostic Menu, use the LEFT and RIGHT Arrow keys to select DIAGNOSTICS from the Top Level Menu. Press the ENTER
key to select the menu.

Note: The Diagnostic Load menu's are not available when the LSS is not enabled. (Machine Setup, Load is set to 0=Not Installed

Press the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to view the load and angle sub-menu and press the enter key. Once in the load and angle
submenu, press the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys to view the various displays.
The Table — Diagnostic Menu Descriptions, page 174 details the structure of the Diagnostic, Load Menu, and describes the meaning of
each piece of information presented.

Table 17. Diagnostic Menu Descriptions


DIAGNOSTICS MENU (Displayed on PARAMETER (Displayed PARAMETER VALUE (Displayed on
Analyzer 1st Line) on Analyzer 2nd Line) Analyzer 2nd Line) DESCRIPTION

DIAGNOSTICS: LOAD Menu available only when Machine Setup’s LOAD is


CUTOUT PLTM or CUTOUT ALL
OVERLOADED? NO Displays NO when the platform load is within rated
NO/YES capacity of the vehicle; YES when platform load is
excessive
PRES 1 RAW:0.00 mA/V Displays the lift cylinder head pressure 1 raw reading;
mA or Volts
shown and mA for ES1330L and ES1530L models
PRES 1: XXXX PSI Displays the lift cylinder head pressure 1 scaled reading in
0.0-9999.9 PSI
PSI
PRES 1: XXXX.X BAR Displays the lift cylinder head pressure 1 scaled reading in
0.0 to 9999.9 BAR
BAR
PRES2 RAW:00.00 mA/V Displays the lift cylinder head pressure 2 raw reading;
mA or Volts shown as volts for 3246R and mA for all remaining models
PRES2: XXXX PSI Displays the lift cylinder head pressure 2 scaled reading in
0.0-9999.9 PSI
PSI
PRES2: XXXX.X BAR Displays the lift cylinder head pressure 2 scaled read-ng in
0.0 to 9999.9 BAR
BAR
PRES DIFFP1-P2: XXX PSI Displays the difference between the lift cylinder 1 and 2
0-999 PSI pressure readings
PRES 3 RAW:0.00 V 0.00-9.99 V Displays the lift cylinder rod pressure raw reading in volts

PRES 3: XXXX PSI 0.0-9999.9 PSI Displays the lift cylinder rod pressure scaled reading in PSI

PRES 3: XXXX.X BAR Displays the lift cylinder rod pressure scaled reading in
0.0 to 9999.9 BAR
BAR
NET FORCE: XX,XXX LB 0.0 to 50,000 LB Displays the calculated lift cylinder net force in LB

PLT LOAD: XX,XXX LB 0.0 to 25,000 LB Displays the estimate platform load in LB

110% CAL? NO Displays NO when the vehicle is calibrated without test


weights using CALIBRATIONS -> LOAD 0% only; YES when
NO / YES the vehicle is fully calibrated with test weights using
CALIBRATIONS -> LOAD 0% and CALIBRATIONS -> LOAD
110%

174 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


LSS Load Sensing System Service

6.1.4 Calibration Preparation


The following procedure must be executed to prepare for calibration and verification.

NOTICE
If the calibration must be performed outdoors, ensure the following additional
conditions are met before beginning calibration procedures:

• Machine is on a slope less than or equal to 0.5 degree.

• Wind speed is less than or equal to 20 mph (32 kph).

• Calibration weight in the platform is centered and evenly distributed.

1. Ensure the batteries are fully charged (24.5V or greater) and hydraulic fluid level is acceptable.

2. Resolve any active control system faults before attempting calibration.

3. Park the vehicle on a level surface. The platform should be fully stowed and level within +/- 0.5 degrees in both directions.

4. Ensure the vehicle temperature is at least +32°F/0°C degrees Fahrenheit.

5. Complete Rotatory Sensor calibration before attempting to calibrate the LSS.

6. Set key switch to Ground Mode.

7. Fully lift down to the stowed position.

8. Remove all foreign materials and debris from the deck.

9. Install any JLG Accessories that will be permanently attached (Electrician's Tree, Panel Carrier, etc.).

10. Connect the JLG Analyzer to the diagnostic port in the wire harness and enter the Access Level 1 password.

11. Adjust the PERSONALITY ' LOAD ' ACC'Y setting (Refer to Table — Personalities Menu Description, page 173) according to the
documentation furnished with the factory-provided accessories or consult JLG.

Table 18. Calibrations Menu


MENU SUB MENU DESCRIPTION
CALIBRATIONS: LOAD 0% CAL LOAD: Press ENTER to begin calibration or ESC to exit
YES: ENTER; NO: ESC
CAL LOAD: FAIL Vehicle must be calibrated in Ground Mode. Set the key switch to Ground Mode and retry.
NOT IN GND MODE
CAL LOAD: FAIL Elevation sensor must be fully calibrated. Follow procedure at CALIBRATIONS -> SET STOW ELEV and
CALIBRATIONS -> SET MAX ELEV and retry.
CAL ANGLE
CAL LOAD: Verify the platform is empty and continue by pressing ENTER, or exit by pressing ESC.
PLATFORM EMPTY?
CAL LOAD: FAIL PLAT NOT Vehicle must be fully stowed. Lift down and retry.
STOWED
PLAT NOT STOWED
CAL LOAD: Engage lift up so the control system can gather dynamic calibration information until the platform reaches
maximum height and then press ENTER
LIFT TO MAX ELEV
CAL LOAD: Engage lift down so the control system can gather dynamic calibration information until the platform reaches
the stowed position

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 175


LSS Load Sensing System Service

Table 18. Calibrations Menu (continued)


MENU SUB MENU DESCRIPTION
LOWER TO STOWED
CAL LOAD: FAIL Lift motion was interrupted and calibration could not be completed
MOTION STOPPED
CAL LOAD: Load Sensing System calibration was successful
COMPLETE!
CAL LOAD: Load Sensing System calibration was not successful so the original values were retained; retry
CAL FAIL

6.1.5 Empty Platform Calibration

Note: Perform this verification procedure annually to confirm LSS is functioning properly.

The following procedure should be executed to calibrate LSS with and without test weights.

1. Ensure the platform is empty.

2. Initiate calibration using the CALIBRATIONS LOAD 0% menu.

3. Lift up to maximum elevation using the ground controls when the LIFT TO MAX ELEV prompt appears.

4. Lift down to the stowed position using the ground controls when the LOWER TO STOWED prompt appears.

5. If successful, the Analyzer will display the COMPLETE prompt. If unsuccessful, a message will be displayed that will help lead to a
resolution (reference the Troubleshooting section of this manual). Press ESC to return to the top level menu.

6.1.6 Loaded Platform Calibration


The following procedure should be executed to calibrate LSS with test weights.

1. Place weight corresponding to 110% of the vehicle's rated load in the center of the platform. Refer to the chart below to
determine the correct weight for calibration on each machine.

Table 19. Platform 110% Calibration Weight


CALIBRATION WEIGHT
ANSI-USA CE
ANSI-EXPORT UKCA
MACHINE
JAPAN GB
CSA AUS
ES1330L 550 lb (250 Kg) 550 lb (250 Kg)

ES1530L 550 lb (250 Kg) 550 lb (250 Kg)

2. Initiate calibration using the CALIBRATIONS LOAD 110% menu.

3. Lift up to maximum elevation using the ground controls when the LIFT TO MAX ELEV prompt appears.

4. Lift down to the stowed position using the ground controls when the LOWER TO STOWED prompt appears.

5. If successful, the Analyzer will display the COMPLETE prompt. If unsuccessful, a message will be displayed that will help lead to a
resolution (reference the Troubleshooting section of this manual). Press ESC to return to the top level menu.

176 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


LSS Load Sensing System Service

6.1.7 LSS Verification


The following procedure should be executed to verify LSS. Verification is a time-saving and effective diagnostic alternative to calibration
at maintenance intervals. Refer to the troubleshooting section of this manual if the Load Sensing System fails to meet these guidelines.

1. Ensure the platform is empty.

2. Initiate verification using the CALIBRATIONS VERIFY menu.

3. Lift up to maximum elevation using the ground controls when the LIFT TO MAX ELEV prompt appears.

4. Lift down to the stowed position using the ground controls when the LOWER TO STOWED prompt appears.

5. If successful, the Analyzer will display the COMPLETE prompt. Press ESC to return to the top level menu.

6. If unsuccessful, the LSS - OUT OF CALIBRATION (8217) fault will be triggered and the LSS should be re-calibrated. Press ESC to
return to the top level menu.

6.1.8 Partial Height Calibration


The machine can be calibrated to only reach a certain elevation when the machine is at maximum height.
To perform this calibration, ensure the platform is empty, the machine is parked on level ground, and the platform is in the stowed
position.

1. Attach the Analyzer at the ground controls.

2. Go to Access Level 1, then scroll to the CALIBRATIONS LOAD 0% menu.

3. Lift up to desired maximum elevation using the ground controls when the LIFT TO MAX ELEV prompt appears.

4. Lift down to the stowed position using the ground controls when the LOWER TO STOWED prompt appears.

5. If successful, the Analyzer will display the COMPLETE prompt. If unsuccessful, a message will be displayed that will help lead to a
resolution (refer to the Trobleshooting section of this manual). Press ESC to return to the top level menu.

6. Ensure the new maximum height has been set by running a lift up/lift down cycle.

7. Repeat steps 1 through 8 for Loaded Platform (Load 110%) calibration.

Note: To recalibrate the machine to reach full elevation, perform the Empty Platform (Load 0%) and Loaded Platform (Load 110%)
Calibration. Allow the machine to reach full elevation.

6.1.9 Testing
The following procedure should be executed to test LSS. The test confirms the LSS does not trigger when the platform carries 100%
rated load, and the LSS continuously triggers when the platform carries 120% rated load. Refer to the troubleshooting section of this
manual if the Load Sensing System fails to meet these guidelines.

1. Connect the JLG Analyzer to the diagnostic port in the wire harness and enter the Access Level 1 password.

2. Note the current setting of MACHINE SETUP LOAD and then adjust it to CUTOUT ALL. This will allow LSS interlocks to work from
Ground Mode.

3. Place weight corresponding to 100% of the vehicle's rated load in the center of the platform. Refer to the LSS Testing Weight Table
below.
Table 20. Platform 100% Calibration Weight
CALIBRATION WEIGHT
ANSI-USA CE
ANSI-EXPORT UKCA
MACHINE
CSA GB
KOR AUS

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 177


LSS Load Sensing System Service

Table 20. Platform 100% Calibration Weight (continued)


CALIBRATION WEIGHT
JPN
ES1330L 500 lb (227 Kg) 500 lb (227 Kg)

ES1530L 500 lb (227 Kg) 500 lb (227 Kg)

4. Lift up to maximum elevation using the ground controls. LSS should not prevent motion and the Ground Overload Indicator
should not illuminate.

5. Lift down to the stowed position using the ground control. LSS should not prevent motion and the Ground Overload Indicator
should not illuminate.

6. Place weight corresponding to 120% of the vehicle's rated load in the center of the platform. Refer to the LSS Testing Weight Table
above.
Table 21. Platform 120% Calibration Weight
CALIBRATION WEIGHT
ANSI-USA CE
ANSI-EXPORT UKCA
MACHINE CSA GB
KOR AUS
JAPAN
ES1330L 600 lb (272 Kg) 600 lb (272 Kg)

ES1530L 600 lb (272 Kg) 600 lb (272 Kg)

7. Lift up using the ground controls. LSS should prevent motion after 1M of maximum platform height, the Ground Overload
Indicator should flash, and the alarm should sound.

8. Use the JLG Analyzer to set MACHINE SETUP LOAD to CUTOUT PLTM. This will prevent LSS interlocks to work from Ground Mode.

9. Continue lift up using the ground controls. The Ground Overload Indicator should flash and the arm should sound. Pause at
intervals to evaluate various heights. LSS indication should continue until the deck exceeds 90% of maximum platform height.

10. Lift down using the ground control. Pause at intervals to evaluate various heights. LSS indication should continue until the deck is
nearly stowed.

6.1.10 LSS Connector Pin Assignments


(Also Refer to Electrical Schematic - Section 8, page 215)
Connections for ES1330L & ES1530L Lift Cylinder Head Pressure Transducer

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION


1 PWR Pressure Transducer Supply (+32V)
2 OUTPUT2 Backup Current Feedback (20-4mA)
3 GND Pressure Transducer Ground (0V)
4 OUTPUT1 Primary Current Feedback (4-20mA)

Connections for ES1330L & ES1530L Lift Cylinder Rod Pressure Transducer

178 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


LSS Load Sensing System Service

PIN SIGNAL DESCRIPTION


A PWR Pressure Transducer Supply (+5V)

B SIG Voltage Feedback (0.5-4.5V)

C GND Pressure Transducer Ground (0V)

6.1.11 LSS Troubleshooting


The following tables are furnished to provide possible resolutions for common difficulties.

Table 22. LSS Troubleshooting


PROBLEM POSSIBLE RESOLUTION
JLG Analyzer displays “FAIL NOT IN GND MODE” The technician has triggered the calibration process but the key switch is not in the Ground Mode position. Change the key-
during LSS calibration switch position and re-attempt LSS calibration.
JLG Analyzer displays “FAIL CAL ANGLE” during The elevation sensor is not calibrated and this must be completed prior to LSS calibration. Execute the elevation sensor
LSS calibration calibration procedure using CALIBRATIONS ̶> SET STOW ELEV and CALIBRATIONS ̶> SET MAX ELEV. Re- attempt LSS
calibration afterward.
JLG Analyzer displays “FAIL PLAT NOT STOWED” The LSS calibration procedure must start with the platform completely stowed. Lift down using ground controls and then re-
during LSS calibration attempt LSS calibration.
JLG Analyzer displays “FAIL MOTION STOPPED” The technician released lift down during the LSS calibration procedure and the calibration data points could not be collected
during LSS calibration by the control system. Re-attempt LSS calibration.

JLG Analyzer displays “CAL FAIL” during LSS The technician halted the LSS calibration procedure by pressing ESC. Alternately, calibration data points collected from the
calibration vehicle did not fit within guidelines. This can be caused by debris in the platform, excessive slide block friction, or structural
damage. This can also occur when accessories are fitted to the platform and the PERSONALITY ̶> LOAD > ̶ ACC’Y setting is
adjusted improperly. Remove debris and address any damaged components. Refer to the documentation for Sky Accessories.

LSS Visual and Audible Overload Warnings fail


to sound when the platform is loaded beyond • LSS is not enabled in the control system. Connect the JLG Analyzer and enter the Access Level 1 password (33271).
rated load. Controls remain functional at Ground Navigate to MACHINE SETUP > ̶ LOAD and adjust the configuration to CUTOUT ALL to prevent platform and ground
and Platform Control positions. controls during an overload. Adjust the configuration to CUTOUT PLTM to prevent platform controls only during an
overload.

• LSS requires re-calibration. Re-calibrate the elevation sensor first, and then the LSS using the procedures listed in this
document.
LSS Visual and Audible Overload Warnings are
active when the platform is empty. • LSS has not been calibrated or calibration has been lost. Calibration data points are stored within the Ground Module so
replacement of this component will cause the need for re-calibration. Adjusting some settings within the MACHINE SETUP
menu will also delete the calibration.

• LSS requires re-calibration. Re-calibrate the elevation sensor first, and then the LSS using the procedures listed in this
document.

• A fault related to LSS has occurred and the vehicle has assumed the platform is overloaded to be conservative. Refer to
the resolution of specific faults in the table below.

Controls remain functional at the Ground Control The MACHINE SETUP > ̶ LOAD setting is configured to prevent Platform Controls only. Connect the JLG Analyzer and enter the
position during an overload. Controls at the Access Level 1 password (33271). Proceed to the MACHINE SETUP > ̶ LOAD menu and adjust the configuration to CUTOUT ALL
Platform Control position are pre- vented. to prevent platform and ground controls during an overload.

PLATFORM OVERLOADED (255) fault is triggered This fault is triggered whenever the LSS is enabled and overloaded.
LSS HAS NOT BEEN CALIBRATED (825) This fault is triggered when LSS has not been calibrated or a configuration change in MACHINE SETUP has deleted the
calibration. Follow the procedure in this document for LSS calibration to resolve.
LSS – OUT OF CALIBRATION (8217) LSS did not meet performance expectations during the verification procedure. If the procedure was not executed properly,
cycle power and re-attempt. Otherwise, the LSS should be re-calibrated. Follow the procedure in this document for LSS
calibration to resolve.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 179


LSS Load Sensing System Service

Table 22. LSS Troubleshooting (continued)


PROBLEM POSSIBLE RESOLUTION
LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 1 – OUT OF ̶ LOAD = CUTOUT ALL or
Pressure1 RawValue is greater than 22.0mA for 500mS. Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP >
RANGE HIGH (8523) CUTOUT PLTM}
LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 1 – OUT OF Pressure1 RawValue is less than 3.5mA for 500mS. Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP -> LOAD = CUTOUT ALL or CUTOUT
RANGE LOW (8524) PLTM}
LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 2 – OUT OF This fault is triggered when the lift cylinder head pressure reading is high. This occurs when ground module V3-15 exceeds
RANGE HIGH (8525) 4.75V for 500mS. Check the wire harness that connects to the lift cylinder for shor t circuits (crushed). Replace the lift
cylinder head pressure transducer if the wire harness is intact. Refer to LSS Theory of Operation.

LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 2 – OUT OF This fault is triggered when the lift cylinder head pressure reading is low. This occurs when ground module V3-15 falls
RANGE LOW (8526) below 0.25V for 500mS. Check the wire harness that connects to the lift cylinder for open circuits (cut or crushed). Ensure
the harness is connected to the pressure transducer and none of the contacts are out of position. Replace the lift cylinder
head pressure transducer if the wire harness is intact. Refer to LSS Theory of Operation.

LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE – For the ES1330L and ES1530L, this fault is triggered when the difference between the primary and backup lift cylinder head
DISAGREEMENT (8527) pressures is greater than 75 PSI for 500mS (V4-7 & V4-17). The fault indicates an issue with the wire harness, pressure
transducer(s), or the ground module. Confirm currents and voltages at the ground module to determine the origin of the
issue. Refer to LSS Theory of Operation.

LIFT CYLINDER ROD PRESSURE 1 – OUT OF This fault is triggered when the lift cylinder rod pressure reading is excessively high. This occurs when ground module V3-5
RANGE HIGH (8528) exceeds 4.75V for 500mS. Check the wire harness that connects to the lift cylinder for short circuits (crushed). Replace the
lift cylinder rod pressure transducer if the wire harness is intact. Refer to LSS Theory of Operation.

LIFT CYLINDER ROD PRESSURE 1 – OUT OF This fault is triggered when the lift cylinder rod pressure reading is excessively low. This occurs when ground module V3-5
RANGE LOW (8529) falls below 0.25V for 500mS. Check the wire harness that connects to the lift cylinder for open circuits (cut or crushed).
Ensure the harness is connected to the pressure transducer and none of the contacts are out of position. Replace the lift
cylinder rod pressure transducer if the wire harness is intact. Refer to LSS Theory of Operation.

LIFT CYLINDER ROD PRESSURE – DISAGREEMENT This fault is triggered when the lift cylinder rod pressure fails to fall below 50PSI after 3000mS (V3-5). This fault is not
(8532) detected when the vehicle is driving, lifting, or steering. This fault indicates an issue with the wire harness, pressure
transducer, or the ground module. Confirm voltage at the ground module to determine the origin of the issue. Refer to LSS
Theory of Operation.

180 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


SECTION 7
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
7.1 INTRODUCTION ................................................................................................................................. 182
7.1.1 System Fault/DTC Indication ............................................................................................. 182
7.2 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC) ................................................................................................... 182
7.3 DTC TABLE ........................................................................................................................................ 182

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 181


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

7.1 INTRODUCTION

This section provides a reference for Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) read from the Multifunction Digital Indicator (MDI) or a handheld
analyzer. For more information on any sensors or indicators, refer to the appropriate manual section. Many of the checks below require
configuring and using a multimeter. Refer to Section 8: General Electrical Information & Schematics for multimeter basics. To
troubleshoot multiple DTCs, start with the DTC with the higher first two digits. The machine is powered by four 6 Volt batteries in series,
providing a nominal 24 Volts to the control system. Some procedures below refer to this nominal voltage (VMN) as 24V. Actual voltage
measurements may differ based on the charge of the batteries. If a correction is made during a check, conclude the check by cycling
the machine power, using the emergency stop switch. It may also be helpful to run a system test, ANALYZER -> SYSTEM TEST for
intermittent or difficult problems.

7.1.1 System Fault/DTC Indication


In addition to the DTC codes being displayed on the MDI and handheld analyzer, DTC codes are indicated by the number of flashes and
pauses of the System Fault indicator on the face of the platform control box as shown below:

7.2 DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODES (DTC)

The DTC tables following are sorted in groups by the first two digits, these digits represent the number of flashes the system distress
indicator lamp will flash on the platform indicator panel when a fault occurs.
For example: a “211” on Table — Diagnostic Trouble Codes (DTC) - Power Up would be indicated by 2 flashes, a pause, then 1 flash, a
pause, then would keep repeating until the fault is cleared.
The more detailed three digit code numbers in the DTC column of the following tables are only indicated on a JLG handheld diagnostic
analyzer.
To troubleshoot multiple DTCs, start with the DTC with the higher first two digits. If a correction is made during a check, conclude the
check by cycling the machine power off then back on, using the emergency stop switch.

7.3 DTC TABLE

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
001 EVERYTHING OK None None Platform Mode and no Faults are active.
• No Motion restrictions
002 GROUND MODE OK None None Ground Mode and no Faults are active.
• No Motion restrictions
003 ALARM SOUNDING – TILTED & ABOVE PF: Continuous None Platform is elevated and chassis is not level.
ELEVATION • No Motion restrictions
• {MACHINE SETUP->TILT CUTOUT =NO} AND Trans-
port State = FALSE AND Tilted State= TRUE
004 DRIVING AT CUTBACK – ABOVE None None Drive State = CREEP Platform is elevated and the machine is in the drive
ELEVATION mode of operation.

• In Platform Mode, Transport State =FALSE AND Move


State =DRIVE
005 DRIVE & LIFT UP PREVENTED TILTED PF: Continuous None Driving and lift up are not possible since the platform is
&ELEVATED • Drive State = PREVENTED elevated and the chassis is not level.
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED • In Platform Mode, Transport State =FALSE AND Tilted
State =TRUE AND {MACHINE SETUP->TILT CUTOUT =
YES}.

182 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
0052 LIFT UP PREVENTED - MAX HEIGHT None None The vehicle has reached the maximum height allowed
REACHED • LiftUp State = PREVENTED by the Indoor/Outdoor selection and further lift up
motion is not possible.

• Platform Height Value? Max Height Allowed Value.


007 DRIVING AT CUTBACK – POTHOLE STILL None None While stowed, drive speed is reduced (due to lower
ENGAGED • Drive State = CREEP ground clearance) since the control system detected that
the pothole protection mechanism is deployed(failed to
retract). Clear the obstacle blocking the pot-hole
protection mechanism, repair the mechanical problem,
re-adjust the pothole limit switches, or repair the wiring
to correct the problem. Alternately,there may be
difficulty with the Elevation Angle Sensor that causes the
Control System to improperly believe the platform is
stowed.

• Applicable only in Platform Mode, and Move State=


DRIVE.

• Transport State =TRUE AND the Pothole State


=BLOCKED or EXTENDED
008 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT – SYSTEM None None A period of time elapsed without activity and the
POWERED DOWN • Enter Safe Control System entered a low-power state to prese ve
battery charge (2 hours). Cycle the Ground EMS in
ModeLiftDown State = Ground Mode or the Platform EMS in Platform Mode to
PREVENTED re-enable the vehicle.

• 45 minutes without Drive Forward, Lift Up, Lift Down,


Steer Left or Steer Right in Platform Mode.

• 10 minutes without Lift Up or Lift Down in


GroundMode.

• Time resets if user changes Platform Mode/Ground


Mode.
009 DRIVE PREVENTED – ELEVATED ABOVE None None The Drive Cutout functionality is enabled, and the Plat-
DRIVE CUTOUT HEIGHT • Drive State = PREVENTED form is Elevated above the Calibrated Cutout Height.
(Refer to Drive Cutout Functionality)

• (Machine Setup-> Drive CutOut= YES) AND


thePlatform Height Value > Drive Cut Value
0053 LIFT UP PREVENTED - LSS MAX HEIGHT None None The vehicle has reached the maximum height allowed
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED by the LSS calibration and further lift up motion is not
possible.

• {MACHINE SETUP -> LOAD=CUTOUT PLTM or CUT-


OUT ALL}

• LSS was calibrated to partial height Platform Height


Value > LSS Partial Height Calibration Limit
211 POWER CYCLE None 2_1 This Help Message is issued at each power-up. Thisser
• No Motion restrictions ves to indicate which messages have been recorded in
the failure log since the last power-upevent.
212 KEYSWITCH FAULTY None 2_1 Both the Ground Select and Platform Select signals are
• Force to Ground Mode energized, which means there is an issue with the key
switch or one of the lines are shorted to battery.

• V4-20 PF_SEL and V1-5 GRND_SEL are energized


simultaneously.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 183


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
221 FUNCTION PROBLEM – HORN None 2_2 Horn Switch in the Platform Control Box was closed
PERMANENTLY SELECTED • Horn Prevented during power-up. Release or repair the switch to clear
the message.

• In Platform Mode and HORN is Energized during


Platform Mode Startup. Retained until HORN is
momentarily De-energized.
2210 TRIGGER CLOSED TOO LONG WHILE IN None 2_2 Trigger Switch in the Platform Control Box was closed
NEUTRAL • Trigger State = FALSE for more than five seconds while the Joystick (accel-
there-fore erator) was in the neutral position (centered).Release
switch or repair the switch / wiring to clear the
• Drive State = PREVENTED difficulty.
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED • In Platform Mode, the TRIGGER input was Energized
for 5,000mS AND Joystick Command is 0% and Stable
• Lift DownState = PRE- (within +/- 0.05V change). Retained until the
VENTED TRIGGER input is momentarily De-ener-gized.
222 FUNCTION PROBLEM – INDOOR / OUT- None 2_2 Indoor / Outdoor Switch in the Platform Control Box was
DOOR PERMANENTLY SELECTED • Previously selected Indoor closed during power-up. Release or repair the switch to
/Outdoor Mode maintained clear the message.

• In Platform Mode, the IN/OUT switch is energized


during Platform Mode Startup. Retained until IN/OUT
is momentarily De-energized.
223 FUNCTION PROBLEM – DRIVE & LIFT None 2_2 The Drive - Lift Selector Switch indicates that both
ACTIVE TOGETHER • Move State = LIFT functions are selected simultaneously. Repair the wiring
or switch to clear the message.
• Drive State = PREVENTED
• In Platform Mode and DRIVE_SEL and LIFT_SELare
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED energized at the same time. Retained until either is
momentarily open circuit.
• Lift Down State = PRE-
VENTED
2232 FUNCTION PROBLEM – DRIVE & LIFT None 2_2 In Platform Mode, the Drive - Lift Selector Switch
BOTH OPEN • Move State = LIFT indicates that neither function is selected. Repair
thewiring or switch to clear the message.
• Drive State = PREVENTED
• In Platform Mode, the DRIVE_SEL and LIFT_SELare
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED open circuit at the same time. Retained until either is
momentarily energized.
• Lift Down State = PRE-
VENTED
224 FUNCTION PROBLEM – STEER LEFT None 2_2 Steer Left Switch in the Platform Control Box was closed
PERMANENTLY SELECTED • Drive State = PREVENTED during power-up. Release or repair the switch to clear
the message.

• In Platform Mode, the STEER_L_SW is Energized


during Platform Mode Startup. Retained until Digital
Input is momentarily De-energized.
225 FUNCTION PROBLEM – STEER RIGHT None 2_2 Steer Right Switch in the Platform Control Box was
PERMANENTLY SELECTED • Drive State = PREVENTED closed during power-up. Release or repair the switch to
clear the message.

• In Platform Mode, the STEER_R_SW is Energized


during Platform Mode Startup. Retained until
momentarily De-energized.
226 ACCELERATOR FAULTY – WIPER OUT OF None 2_2 The joystick (accelerator) wiper signal input is out-side
RANGE • Drive State = PREVENTED the acceptable voltage range. The wiper wire may be

184 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED off, shorted to +B, or shorted to –B (ground)to cause
this difficulty.
• LiftDown State = PRE-
VENTED • In Platform Mode, JOY_SIG is > 4.50V OR <0.50V.
Retained until the EMS is cycled.
227 STEER SWITCHES FAULTY None 2_2 Both the Steer Left and Steer Right Inputs are closed as
• Drive State = PREVENTED the same time. A short in the Steer Switch wiring or a
failed Steer Switch can cause this difficulty.

• In Platform Mode, the STEER_L_SW is EnergizedAND


STEER_R_SW is Energized. Retained until the EMS is
cycled.
228 FUNCTION LOCKED OUT – ACCELERATOR None 2_2 Selected function (Drive or Lift) is not allowed because
NOT CENTERED • Drive State = PREVENTED the joystick (accelerator) was not centered at power-up.
Return joystick to center momentarily.
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED
• In Platform Mode, the JOY_SIG must be 0% and
• LiftDown State = PRE- Stable (within +/- 0.05V change) for 1000mS after
VENTED Power-up or this fault will be issued. Recovey
permitted once the conditions are met (EMS re-cycle
not necessary).
229 FUNCTION PROBLEM – TRIGGER None 2_2 Trigger Switch in the Platform Control Box was closedat
PERMANENTLY CLOSED • Drive State = PREVENTED power-up. Release switch or repair the switch /wiring to
clear the difficulty.
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED
• In Platform Mode, the TRIGGER is Energized during
• LiftDown State = PRE- Platform Mode Startup. Cleared once TRIGGER is
VENTED momentarily De-energized.
231 FUNCTION PROBLEM – LIFT None 2_3 In Ground Mode then Lift Switch (Up or Down) in the Ground Control Box was
PERMANENTLY SELECTED closed during power-up. Release or repair the switch to
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED clear the message.
• Lift Down State = PRE- • In Ground Mode, [LIFT_UP_SW OR LIFT_DN_SWis
VENTED Energized] during Ground Mode Startup. Retained
until the respective Digital Input is momentarily De-
energized.

• This fault should not become active in Platform


Mode.
232 GROUND LIFT UP/DOWN ACTIVE None 2_3 In Ground Mode then In Ground Mode, the control system has detected theLift
TOGETHER Up and Down are active simultaneously. Check the Lift
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED Switch and associated wiring in the Ground Control Box.
• LiftDown State = PRE- • In Ground Mode, LIFT_UP_SW is Energized ANDLIFT_
VENTED DN_SW is Energized. Retained until the EMS is
cycled.

• This fault should not become active in Platform


Mode.
233 FUNCTION PROBLEM - BRAKE RELEASE None 2_3 In Ground Mode only In Ground Mode, the Manual Brake Release Digital Input
PERMANENTLY SELECTED is energized at power-up. Retained until the respective
• Brake Release State = Digital Input is momentarily de-ener-gized.
FALSE (Brake Release
Option is notallowed to
disengage brakes)

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 185


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
23200 LIFT UP SWITCH - INVALID SIGNAL 2_3 In Ground Mode and the Ground Module detects a
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED redundancy disagreement on the LIFT_UP_SW input for
500ms. Ignore this fault in Platform Mode.
23201 LIFT DOWN SWITCH - INVALID SIGNAL 2_3 In Ground Mode and the Ground Module detects a
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED redundancy disagreement on the LIFT_DN_SWinput for
500ms. Ignore this fault in Platform Mode.
• LiftDown State = PRE-
VENTED
23202 POTHOLE PREVENTION SWITCH 1 2_3 The Ground Module detects a redundancy disagree-ment
-INVALID SIGNAL • Pothole State = BLOCKED on the PHP_SW1 input for 500ms. This error isvalid in
both Ground Mode and Platform Mode.
23203 POTHOLE PREVENTION SWITCH 2 2_3 The Ground Module detects a redundancy disagree-ment
-INVALID SIGNAL • Pothole State = BLOCKED on the PHP_SW2 input for 500ms. This error is valid in
both Ground Mode and Platform Mode.
23204 CHARGE INTERLOCK - INVALID SIGNAL 2_3 The Ground Module detects a redundancy disagreement
• Charge Interlock State on the CHARGE_INTRLK input for 500ms. This error is
=TRUE valid in both Ground Mode and Platform Mode.
23205 ELEVATION SENSORS - INVALID SIGNAL 2_3 The control system has detected a disagreement
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED between Elevation Sensor 1 and Elevation Sensor 2.
Check the Elevation Sensors and associated wiring.
• Platform Height Value
assumed to be Full • Only Valid if {MACHINE SETUP->LOAD? NO}
Elevation for the purposes ANDROTS1_SIG and ROTS2_SIG are not +/- .25V
of other interlocks ofthe normalized voltage.
• Overload State = TRUE • This fault shall be suppressed if the DTC 252 ELE-
VATION SENSORS NOT CALIBRATED fault is active.
23238 ELEVATION ANGLE SENSOR MAX None 2_3 Successfully complete the SET MAX ELEVATION calibra-
ELEVATION - NOT CALIBRATED • OverLoad State = TRUE if tion procedure to clear the message.
{MACHINE SETUP
>LOAD≠NO) • The Elevation Sensor was not calibrated at max
elevation
241 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR –OUT PF: Continuous 2_4 The temperature as communicated by the tempera-ture/
OF RANGE LOW • Drive and Lift Restrictions tilt sensor is less than -40 degrees Celsius. If Transpor t
State = FALSE, then set Drive State =CREEP, Lift
DownState = MAX Lift Up State = PRE-VENTED. The
platform alarm shall continuouslysound. If Transpor t
State= TRUE, then set Drive State =MAX, Lift Down
State = MAX, and Lift Up State =PREVENTED, the
platform alarm shall continu-ously sound.
242 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR –OUT PF: Continuous 2_4 The temperature as communicated by the tempera-ture/
OF RANGE HIGH • Drive and Lift Restrictions tilt sensor is greater than +85 degrees Celsius.

• If Transpor t State = FALSE, then set Drive State


=CREEP, Lift Down State = MAX, and Lift UpState
=PREVENTED. The platform alarm shall continu-ously
sound.

• If Transport State= TRUE, then set Drive State


=MAX, Lift Down State = MAX, and Lift Up State
=PREVENTED, the platform alarm shall continu-ously
sound.
251 ELEV ANGLE SENSOR FAULTY – VOLT- None 2_5 The input voltage from the sensor that measureslower
AGE OUT OF RANGE • Lift UpState = PREVENTED arm motion is outside acceptable range. Thismay be
caused by difficulty with the sensor wiring, ora faulty
sensor. Check mounting, review sensor wir-ing against

186 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
• Platform Height Value the electrical schematic, or replace thesensor to clear the
assumed to be Full message.
Elevation for the purposes
of other interlocks • Elevation1RawValue from the ROTS1_SIG is(>4.5V OR
<0.50V).
• Arm Guard
Functionalityshall be
disabled

• Overload State = TRUE if


{MACHINE SETUP-
>LOAD≠NO)
2512 ELEV ANGLE SENSOR NOT DETECTING None 2_5 The input voltage from the Elevation Angle Sensor that
CHANGE • Lift Up State = PREVENTED measures lower arm motion did not respond properly
while the vehicle was lifting up. Check mounting, review
• Platform Height Value sensor wiring against the electrical schematic, or replace
assumed to be Full the sensor to clear the message. This fault is not
Elevation required for the redundant elevationangle sensor fitted
for pressure-based LSS systems.

• Elevation1RawValue does not change more than 0.3


degrees of elevation for 5000mS or decreases while
lifting up.

• The platform elevation is not close to reaching max


height.

• The pump is being commanded at half to full speed.

• DTC251 ELEV ANGLE SENSOR FAULTY - VOLTAGEOUT


OF RANGE not active.

• DTC252 ELEV ANGLE SENSOR HAS NOT BEEN CALI-


BRATED not active.

• MACHINE SETUP –> LOAD = NONE


252 ELEV ANGLE SENSOR HAS NOT BEEN None 2_5 Calibrate the Elevation Angle Sensor using the
CALIBRATED • Lift UpState = PREVENTED calibration procedure to clear the message.
• Platform Height Value • The Elevation Sensor’s Calibration EEPROM is set to
assumed to be Full the signature implanted by the In-Circuit TestFixture
Elevation for the purposes (has never been calibrated by the factory). Retained
of other interlocks until Calibration EEPROM is over-written by a valid
calibration.
• Overload State = TRUE if
{MACHINE SETUP- • Need to recheck this setting for the redundant
>LOAD≠NO) sensors as well if MACHINE SETUP->LOAD≠ NO
2520 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT - CONSTANT None 2_5 The Ground Module's Application and Constant
DATA VERSION IMPROPER • Drive State = PREVENTED DataVersions do not match which could lead to
improperoperation therefore machine shall not be
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED allowed to function.
• LiftDown State = PRE- • The Ground Module's Application and Constant-Data
VENTED Versions do not match.
253 DRIVE PREVENTED – CHARGER None 2_5 Driving is not possible since the vehicle is charging.
CONNECTED • Drive State = PREVENTED
• In Platform Mode, the Charge Interlock State=TRUE
AND Move State = Drive.
254 DRIVE & LIFT UP PREVENTED – None 2_5 Driving and Lifting are not possible since the vehicleis
CHARGER CONNECTED • Drive State = PREVENTED charging and it is configured to prevent all motion.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 187


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED
• Charge Interlock State= TRUE AND {MACHINESETUP->
CHARGE INTERLOC= DRV & LIFT UP}.
255 PLATFORM OVERLOADED PF: 2_5 While the Load Sensing System is enabled, the Plat-form
5000msON/ • Drive and Lift Restrictions Load measured by the Load Sensing System is excessive.
2000msOFFG- Functions from Platform Control Station are prevented,
ND: 5000ms and functions from Ground Control may be prevented,
ON/2000ms depending on machine configuration (Markets other
OFF than Japan). For the Japanese Market, only Lift Up is
prevented and Drive (at creep speed) is allowed in the
stowed position .Refer to LSS functionality for Lift and
Drive restrictions.

• This fault shall be suppressed if technician navi-gates


to the CALIBRATIONS menu of the ANALYZER.
256 DRIVE PREVENTED – POTHOLE NOT If 2_5 While elevated, driving is not possible since the control
ENGAGED {MACHINESET- • Drive State = PREVENTED system detected that the pothole protection mechanism
UP- failed to deploy. Clear the obstacle blocking the pothole
>PHPALARM protection mechanism, repair the mechanical problem,
= YES}PF: re-adjust the pothole limit switches, or repair the wiring
500ms On/ to correct the problem. Alternately, there may be
500ms difficulty with the Elevation Angle Sensor that causes the
OffGND: Control System to improperly believe the platform is
500msOn/ elevated.
500ms Off
• In Platform Mode AND Move State = DRIVE AND
Transport State= FALSE AND Pothole State
=BLOCKED or RETRACTED.

• Platform and Ground alarm shall only sound if


{MACHINE SETUP->PHP ALARM = YES} and thisDTC is
active
2568 TEMPERATURE CUTOUT ACTIVE - If Transport- 2_5 The temperature as communicated by the tempera-ture
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE TOO LOW Mode = • Drive and Lift Restrictions sensor located on the temperature/tilt sensor is less than
TRUEPF: or equal to {PERSONALITIES->TEMP CUT-OUT->CUTOUT
ContinuousIf SET}(See Low Temperature Cutout Functionality)
Transport-
Mode = FALSE • Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP->LOW
PF: OFF TEMPCUTOUT=YES}

• This DTC shall not be displayed in Ground Mode,and


no restrictions shall be implemented.
259 MODEL CHANGED – HYDRAULICS None 2_5 The user changed the Model Selection using the JLG
SUSPENDED – CYCLE EMS • Drive State = PREVENTED Analyzer. All functions are being prevented until the
EMS is cycled.
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED
• This fault shall be suppressed if DTC 9924 is active.
• Lift Down State = PRE- Similar to DTC 9924 but a valid model has been
VENTED selected.

• {MACHINE SETUP-> MODEL NUMBER} selection was


changed via the Analyzer.
2516 DRIVE PREVENTED - ABOVE ELEVATION None 2_5
• Drive State = PREVENTED • In Platform Mode, function select is set to Driveand
Low Height Drive Cut State is TRUE.
258 DRIVE & LIFT PREVENTED – BRAKES None 2_5
ELECTRICALLY RELEASED FOR TOWING • Drive State = PREVENTED • Brake Release Digital Input is Energized for1000mS
and Ground Mode is Selected.
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED

188 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
• Lift Down State = PRE- • Charger not charging.
VENTED
• Brake Release Digital Input is not re-energized after
initial activation.
2586 FUNCTIONS PREVENTED - OVERHEAD None 2_5
OBSTRUCTION • Lift Up State = PREVENTED • MACHINE SETUP –> OVERHEAD PROTECT = YES

• If Transport State is • Overhead protection switch is open.


FALSE, Drive State =
PREVENTED • The machine is in Platform Mode OR (Themachine is
in Ground Mode AND the platform boxis detected on
CAN.
324 VALVE ENABLE DRIVER PERMANENTLY None 3_2 The VSW signal is shorted to Battery during startupprior
ON • Drive State = PREVENTED to enabling the VSW switch.
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED • VSW > 5V when VSW switch is in the off state.
3310 STEER RIGHT VALVE – OPEN CIRCUIT None 3_3 Open Circuit detected on STEER_R_VLV.
• Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED


3311 GROUND ALARM– SHORT TO BATTERY None 3_3 Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP->WHITE
• Disable Output NOISEALARM=YES}Short to Battery was detected on
WN_ALARM.
33208 HORN - SHORT TO BATTERY None 3_3 Short to Battery was detected on GRND_ALRM_SIG.
• Disable Output
33209 HORN SHORT TO GROUND None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on GRND_ALRM_SIG.
• Disable Output
33298 STEER LEFT VALVE – SHORT TO GROUND None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on STEER_L_VLV
• Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED


33299 LINE CONTACTOR COIL – SHORT TO None 3_3 The Ground Module has been powered up due to
BATTERY • Enter Safe Mode awiring fault since neither the Ground Mode or Plat-
form Mode Digital input are Energized. This could be
• LiftDown State = MAX due to the VON pin being shorted to battery.

• Ground Module is powered but both V4-20 PF_SEL


and V1-5 GRND_SEL are read as deener-gized.
333 LIFT UP VALVE – SHORT TO BATTERY None 3_3 Short to Battery was detected on LIFT_UP_VLV.
• Disable Output

• LiftUp State = PREVENTED

• Drive State = PREVENTED


33305 STEER RIGHT VALVE – SHORT TO None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on STEER_R_VLV.
GROUND • Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED


33384 BEACON LIGHT – SHORT TO GROUND None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on BEACON AND{MACHINE
• Disable Output SETUP-> BEACON= YES}.
• No motion restrictions
334 LIFT UP VALVE – OPEN CIRCUIT None 3_3 Open Circuit detected on LIFT_UP_VLV.
• Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 189


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
33406 LIFT UP VALVE – SHORT TO GROUND None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on LIFT_UP_VLV.
• Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED


33407 LIFT DOWN VALVE – SHORT TO GROUND None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on LIFT_DN_VLVwhen all
• Disable High side Output the following conditions are true:
• Open Low side Output • Low Side FET enabled
• LiftDown State = PRE- • PWM is > 45% duty cycle
VENTED
• High Side Feedback < 10 counts
• LiftUp State = PREVENTED
• Low Side Current Feedback < 50 mA
335 LIFT DOWN VALVE – SHORT TO None 3_3 Short to Battery was detected on LIFT_DN_VLV.
BATTERY • Disable High side Output
• This fault covers both if the High side Output or ifthe
• Open Low side Output Low side Output is shor ted to Battery.
• LiftDown State = PRE-
VENTED

• LiftUp State = PREVENTED


33562 BEACON LIGHT – SHORT TO BATTERY None 3_3 Short to Battery was detected on BEACON AND{MACHINE
• Disable Output SETUP-> BEACON=YES}.
• No motion restrictions • This will only be triggered when ARMGUARD is active
and the short to battery occurs under the Arm guard
limit.
336 LIFT DOWN VALVE – OPEN CIRCUIT None 3_3 Open Circuit detected on LIFT_DN_VLV.
• Disable High side Output

• Open Low side Output

• LiftDown State = PRE-


VENTED

• LiftUp State = PREVENTED


33674 PLATFORM POWER – SHORT TO None 3_3 GroundMode Short to Battery was detected on PLATFORM_PWRIgnore
BATTERY this Fault in Platform Mode.
• Disable output
33675 PLATFORM POWER – OPEN CIRCUIT None 3_3 Ignore this fault for following reasons.
• N/A
• N/A in Ground Mode.

• No diagnostic value in Platform Mode, would only


increase startup time.
33676 PLATFORM POWER – SHORT TO None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on PLATFORM_PWRIgnore
GROUND • Platform Mode Prevented this Fault in Ground Mode.
• Disable output
337 STEER LEFT VALVE – SHORT TO None 3_3 Short to Battery was detected on STEER_L_VLV.
BATTERY • Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED

• LiftUp State = PREVENTED

190 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
3371 GROUND ALARM– SHORT TO GROUND None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on WN_ALARMOnly
• Disable output applicable if {MACHINE SETUP->WHITE NOISEALARM=
YES}.
3379 HOUR METER– SHORT TO GROUND None 3_3 Short to Ground was detected on HOUR_MTR.
• Disable output
33739 LIFT DOWN VALVE - CURRENT FEED- None 3_3 Current Reading Too Low was detected on LIFT_D-N_
BACK READING TOO LOW • Normal operation VLV.

• Low Side FET enabled

• PWM is > 45% duty cycle

• High Side Feedback > 10 counts

• Low Side Current Feedback < 250 mA


338 STEER LEFT VALVE – OPEN CIRCUIT None 3_3 Open Circuit detected on STEER_L_VLV.
• Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED


3381 HOUR METER– SHORT TO BATTERY None 3_3 Short to Battery was detected on HOUR_MTR.
• Disable output
339 STEER RIGHT VALVE – SHORT TO None 3_3 Short to Battery was detected on STEER_R_VLV.
BATTERY • Disable Output

• Drive State = PREVENTED

• LiftUp State = PREVENTED


426 MASTER MODULE TEMPERATURE –OUT 4_2 The Ground Module's internal temperature sensor is out
OF RANGE • Normal operation of range. (< 104°F/40°C or > 302°F/150°C).

• Flag Error to show that analog input readings are not


being temperature compensated, and allow normal
operation.

• Not having temperature compensation affects


Elevation sensor accuracy and Pressure transducer
accuracy.
441 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO LOW – None 4_4 Battery Voltage (VBAT) momentarily dropped below
SYSTEMSHUTDOWN • Safe Mode 14.5V when using flooded lead-acid batteries, or 16.0V
when using AGM batteries. With a low battery charge,
• LiftDown State = PRE- this can occur during heavy current demand due to
VENTED Drive, Steer, or Lift Up. Recharge batteries or check for
damaged batteries, sulfated batteries, or poor power
connections. VBAT shall be measured at all times, and
this fault can be engaged at any time, even while
Driving, Lift-ing, or Steering is active.

• The Ground Module measured battery voltage less


than 14.5V when {MACHINE SETUP-> BATTERY =
FLOODED}.

• The Ground Module measured battery voltage less


than 16.0V when {MACHINE SETUP-> BATTERY =
AGM}.

• Suppress all Help Messages caused by the lack of


system power.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 191


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
442 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH – None 4_4 The Ground Module measured excessively high bat-tery
SYSTEMSHUTDOWN • Safe Mode voltage (VBAT) (>32.0V) and de-energized the Main
Line Contactor and Battery Relay to protect system
• LiftDown State = MAX devices and was unable to bring voltage down to
normal operating range. This may be due to improper
battery charging or incorrect voltage batteries being
used.

• The Ground Module measured battery voltage greater


than 32.0V.

• Main Line Contactor and Battery Relay should be de-


energized.

• Suppress all Help Messages caused by the lack of


system power.
4421 LOGIC SUPPLY VOLTAGE OUT OF None 4_4 The Ground Module's VSW voltage was measured to be
RANGEHIGH • Safe Mode more than 32V. This may be caused by loose battery
terminal, severely discharge batteries, a dam-aged
• LiftDown State = MAX battery, or an improper wire harness connection.
446 LOGIC SUPPLY VOLTAGE OUT OF None 4_4 The Ground Module's VSW voltage was measured to be
RANGELOW • Lift Up State = PREVENTED out of range <13V by the Ground Module. This may be
caused by loose battery terminal, severely discharged
• Platform Height Value batteries, a damaged batter y, or an improper wire
assumed to be Full harness connection.
Elevation for the purposes
of other interlocks • This fault shall be suppressed if DTC 441 is active.
• . Over Load State = TRUE .
447 VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUT OF RANGE None 4_4 The Ground Modules 5V supply voltage was mea-sured
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED to be out of range (<4.5V or >5.5V). This maybe caused
by loose batter y terminal, severely dis-charged
• Platform Height Value batteries, a damaged battery, or an improper wire
assumed to be Full harness connection.
Elevation for the purposes
of other interlocks

• . Over Load State = TRUE


4476 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH –UNPLUG None 4_4 The Ground Module momentarily measured exces-sively
CHARGER • Enter Safe Mode high battery voltage (VBAT) (>32.0V) and entered Safe
Mode to protect system devices. This may be due to
• Lift Down State = MAX improper batter y charging or incorrect voltage batteries
being used.

• The Ground Module measured battery voltage greater


than 32.0V and Charge Interlock State =TRUE.

• Main Line Contactor and Battery Relay should be de-


energized.

• Suppress all Help Messages caused by the lack of


system power.
4477 BATTERY VOLTAGE TOO HIGH – FORC- None 4_4 The Ground Module momentarily measured exces-sively
ING DISCHARGE • Disable VSW, high battery voltage (VBAT) (>32.0V) and entered Safe
Mode. This may be due to improper battery charging or
LiftDown State = PREVENTED incorrect voltage batteries being used.
LiftUp State = PREVENTED
Drive State = PREVENTED • The Ground Module measured battery voltage greater
suppress other system errors, than 32.0V and Charge Interlock State =FALSE.
then Energize STEER_R_VLV

192 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
and STEER_L_VLV and • System Devices powered by VSW will be disabled.
monitor VBAT
• Suppress all DTC Messages caused by the lack of
system power. (Pump Module, Platform Module ,Tilt
Sensors, LSS, and Pothole Protection).

• GM shall energize STEER_L_VLV and STEER_R_VLV


in an effort to lower float charge down below 31V to
get to normal operation state.

• If VBAT reading does not go below 31V after 10


seconds, GM shall be energize the STEER_L_VLV and
STEER_R_VLV and latch DTC 442.

• If VBAT reading does go below 31V before 10


seconds, GM shall enable VSW and resume with
normal startup procedure.
4478 GROUND MODULE - OVERCURRENT None 4_4 The current being measured through the Ground Module
• Enter Safe Mode is too high.
• LiftDown State = MAX • The Ground Module measure more than 8 Amps
through the VSW switch.
448 VOLTAGE REFERENCE OUT OF RANGE None 4_4 The Ground Modules 3.3V supply voltage was measured
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED to be out of range (<3.135V or >3.465V). This may be
caused by issues with the 3.3V supply or the V5P0
• Drive State = PREVENTED reference supply on the Ground Module.
662 CANBUS FAILURE – PLATFORM MOD- None 6_6 In Platform Mode, the control system failed to receive
ULE • All Platform functions Pre- messages from the Platform Module. Check wiring at the
vented. Normal operation Platform Box. Check wiring along scissor arms leading up
from Ground Mode to Platform.

• Digital Input Message – Motion (0x00) not received


for 250mS AND Platform Mode selected.

• This error shall be suppressed anytime that VSW is


De-energized or if unit is in Safe Mode.
6649 CANBUS FAILURE – TILT/TEMP SENSOR None 6_6 The control system failed to receive messages from the
• Tilted State= TRUE tilt sensor.
• Low Temp Cut= TRUE if • Tilt Sensor CAN communication not received for
{MACHINE SETUP- 1000ms.
>TEMPCUTOUT = YES}
• Temp Sensor considered to be unhealthy if Low
Temperature Cutout configured.
811 TILT SENSOR NOT CALIBRATED None 8_1 The Chassis Tilt Sensor has never been calibrated so the
• Tilted State =TRUE control system assumes that the vehicle is tilted.Drive
(+20.0’X, +20.0’ Y); Max speed is reduced since a valid tilt reading is not
Drive Speed Value = available. Calibrate the Tilt Sensor using the calibra-tion
Worst-Case Slope Descent procedure to clear the message.
Functionality for both For
ward and Reverse • The Tilt Sensor’s Calibration EEPROM is set to the
signature implanted by the In-Circuit Test Fixture.
Retained until Calibration EEPROM is over-written by
a valid calibration.
8214 LSS ANGLE SENSOR – OUT OF RANGE None 8_2 The Elevation1 Raw Value reading when the machine is
HIGH • Lift Up State = PREVENTED at maximum elevation has deviated from the Ele-
vation1MaxCalValue. Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP-
> LOAD ≠ NO}.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 193


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
• Platform Height Value
assumed to be Full • Elevation1RawValue > (Elevation1MaxCalValue+.2V)
Elevation for the purposes
of other interlocks • This fault shall be suppressed if DTC 825 LSS HAS
NOT BEEN CALIBRATED fault is active.
• Arm Guard Functionality
shall be disabled • This fault shall be suppressed if DTC 252 ELEVANGLE
SENSOR HAS NOT BEEN CALIBRATED fault is active.
• Latch DTC 252 to require
re-calibration of Angle
Sensors
8215 LSS ANGLE SENSOR – OUT OF RANGE None 8_2 The Elevation1 Raw Value reading when the machine is
LOW • Lift Up State = PREVENTED at maximum elevation has deviated from the Ele-
vation1MinCalValue. Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP-
• Platform Height Value > LOAD ≠ NO}.
assumed to be Full
Elevation for the purposes • Elevation1RawValue < (Elevation1MinCalValue - .2V)
of other interlocks
• This fault shall be suppressed if DTC 825 LSS HAS
• Arm Guard Functionality NOT BEEN CALIBRATED fault is active.
shall be disabled
• This fault shall be suppressed if DTC 252 ELEVANGLE
• Latch DTC 252 to require SENSOR HAS NOT BEEN CALIBRATED fault is active.
re-calibration of Angle
Sensors
825 LSS HAS NOT BEEN CALIBRATED None 8_2 The Load Sensing System has never been calibrated and
• Overload State= TRUE the control system assumes that the platform is
overloaded. Calibrate the Load Sensing System using the
calibration procedure to clear the message. Only
applicable if {MACHINE SETUP-> LOAD ≠ NO}.
8217 LSS - OUT OF CALIBRATION None 8_2
• Overload State= TRUE • Only applicable when {MACHINE SETUP -> LOADis
CUTOUT PLTM or CUTOUT ALL} AND {MACHINESETUP
–> LOAD CFG = PRESSURE}. The Load Sensing
System has failed verification. Cycle power and follow
calibration procedure to clear the message.
8523 LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 1 -OUT None 8_5
OF RANGE HIGH • Overload State= TRUE • Pressure1RawValue is greater than 22.0mA for
500mS. Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP->LOAD =
• Disable VSHORT FET CUTOUT ALL or CUTOUT PLTM} AND {MACHINE SETUP
–> LOAD CFG = PRESSURE} Ignored if machine is in
SAFE MODE
8524 LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 1 -OUT None 8_5
OF RANGE LOW • Overload State= TRUE • Pressure1RawValue is less than 3.5mA for 500mS.
Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP-> LOAD =CUTOUT
ALL or CUTOUT PLTM }AND {MACHINESETUP –> LOAD
CFG = PRESSURE} and {MACHINE SETUP Ignored if
machine is in SAFE MODE
8525 LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 2 -OUT None 8_5
OF RANGE HIGH • Overload State= TRUE • Pressure2RawValue is greater than 22.0mA for
500mS. Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP->LOAD =
CUTOUT ALL or CUTOUT PLTM} AND {MACHINE SETUP
–> LOAD CFG = PRESSURE} AND {MACHINE SETUP
Ignored if machine is in SAFE MODE
8526 LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE 2 -OUT None 8_5
OF RANGE LOW • Overload State= TRUE • Pressure2RawValue is less than 3.5mA for 500mS.
Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP-> LOAD =CUTOUT
ALL or CUTOUT PLTM} AND {MACHINE SETUP –>

194 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
LOAD CFG = PRESSURE} AND {MACHINE SETUP
Ignored if machine is in SAFE MODE
8527 LIFT CYLINDER HEAD PRESSURE - DIS- None 8_5
AGREEMENT • Overload State= TRUE • {MACHINE SETUP-> LOAD = CUTOUT PLTM or CUT-
OUT ALL}

• {MACHINE SETUP –> LOAD CFG = PRESSURE}

• ABS [Pressure1Value - Pressure2Value] greater than


180 PSI for 500ms

• DTC 8523, 8524, 8525, 8526 are not active Ignored if


machine is in SAFE MODE
8528 LIFT CYLINDER ROD PRESSURE 1 - OUT None 8_5
OF RANGE HIGH • Overload State= TRUE • Pressure3RawValue is greater than 4.75V for 500mS.
Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP->LOAD = CUTOUT
ALL or CUTOUT PLTM} AND {MACHINE SETUP –>
LOAD CFG = PRESSURE}
8529 LIFT CYLINDER ROD PRESSURE 1 - OUT None 8_5
OF RANGE LOW • Overload State= TRUE • Pressure3Raw Value is less than 0.25V for 500mS.
Only applicable if {MACHINE SETUP-> LOAD =CUTOUT
ALL or CUTOUT PLTM} AND {MACHINE SETUP –>
LOAD CFG = PRESSURE}
8532 LIFT CYLINDER ROD PRESSURE - DIS- None 8_5 Pressure3RawValue is greater than 50PSI for 10,000mS
AGREEMENT • Overload State= TRUE (both Constant Data) while all of the following are true:

• Platform Height Value stable within 2.0 inches


(Constant Data).

• Drive not active.

• Lift not active.

• Steer not active.

• Machine Setup –> LOAD is CUTOUT ALL or CUT-OUT


PLTM

• MACHINE SETUP –> LOAD CFG = PRESSURE

• DTC 8528 not active.

• DTC 8529 not active.


9910 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT – PLATFORM None 9_9 If Platform Mode The control system will not function in Platform Mode
MODULE SOFTWARE VERSION IMPROPER because the Platform Module Software Version is not
• Drive State = PREVENTED compatible with the rest of the system. Re-pro-gram or
replace with a Version 1.xx module.The Platform Module
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED reported a Software Major Version that was not equal to
“1” while in Platform-Mode. The control system may
• Lift Down State = resume operation once the difficulty has been corrected.
PREVENTED
9924 FUNCTIONS LOCKED OUT – MACHINE None 9_9 The Ground Module has not been configured for the first
NOT CONFIGURED • Drive State = PREVENTED time. Use the JLG Analyzer to adjust all Machine Setup
and Personality settings and re-cycle power to clear
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED difficulty. This fault shall be suppressed if DTC 259 is
active.
• Lift Down State =
PREVENTED • This fault shall only be active if current selection is
UNKNOWN or NO MODEL. Other wise, as long as user
changes to a valid selection DTC 259 shall be active.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 195


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
• The Ground Module’s non-volatile flag indicates that
the vehicle has not been configured (new control
system components). Retained until {MACHINE
SETUP->MODEL} and {MACHINESETUP->MARKET} are
selected and power is re-cycled.
9949 MACHINE CONFIGURATION OUT OF Continuously 9_9 Ground Module detects one of these issues:
RANGE – CHECK ALL SETTINGS • Drive State = PREVENTED
• Machine Setup parameter or Personality is out of
• Lift Up State = PREVENTED range Machine Setup check sum improper.
• Lift Down State = •
PREVENTED
To fix the issue follow below process:

• Cycle the power.


Toggle the models.

• Personality resetting.

• Performing a factory reset.

• Reinstall the software.


998 EEPROM FAILURE – CHECK ALL None 9_9 The control system detected an EEPROM failure.
SETTINGS • Enter Safe Mode Personalities and Machine Setup settings may be reset
to default values. Check / correct all settings and re-cycle
• Lift Down State = PRE- power to clear difficulty.
VENTED
• The Ground Module’s EEPROM checksum indicates
corruption. Retained until EEPROM settings are
corrected and power is recycled.

.To fix the issue follow below process:

• Cycle the power.

• Toggle the models.

• Personality resetting.

• Performing a factory reset.

Reinstall the software.


3116 MAIN CONTACTOR COIL - SHORT TO None 3_1 The Low Side of the Main Contactor contact is Shorted
BATTERY • Drive State = PREVENTED to Battery.
• Lift Up State =
PREVENTED
3117 MAIN CONTACTOR COIL - OPEN CIRCUIT None 3_1 The coil of the Main Contactor is open circuit. Check
• Drive State = PREVENTED continuity to the GM and Power Module. Check Coil
impedance of the contactor coil.
• Lift Up State =
PREVENTED
3118 MAIN CONTACTOR COIL - SHORT TO None 3_1 The Main Contactor Coil is shorted to ground. Check the
GROUND • Drive State = PREVENTED high side and low side of the coil for a short to battery
ground.
• Lift Up State =
PREVENTED
3113 MAIN CONTACTOR - OPEN CIRCUIT None 3_1 The Power Module is not detecting Voltage on its B
• Drive State = PREVENTED +input. Verify the battery fuse is intact. If B+ on the
Power Module is below 14V with this fault active,replace

196 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
• Lift Up State = contactor. If B+ on the Power Module is greater than
PREVENTED 14V, replace the power module.
33815 POWER MODULE BRAKE WIRING -ISSUE None 3_3 The Power Module has detected a Short or Open
• Drive State = PREVENTED circuitinside one of the brakes or on wiring to the
brakes.
• Lift Up State =
PREVENTED
33823 POWER MODULE MOTOR CURRENT -OUT None 3_3 The Power Module detects if Drive Motor current is
OF RANGE • Drive State = PREVENTED tooHigh or Too low. This can be caused by a short circuit
oropen circuit in the motor wiring or within the
• Lift Up State = motorwindings
PREVENTED
33824 POWER MODULE PUMP CURRENT -OUT None 3_3 The Power Module detects if Pump Motor current is
OF RANGE • Drive State = PREVENTED tooHigh or Too low. This can be caused by a short circuit
oropen circuit in the motor wiring or within the motor
• Lift Up State = windings.
PREVENTED
421 POWER MODULE TOO HOT – PLEASE None 4_2
WAIT • Drive State = PREVENTED • The Power Module Temperature is too high. Allow
the Power Module to cool before continuing
• Lift Up State = operations.
PREVENTED
44161 POWER MODULE VOLTAGE – OUT OF None 4_4 The Power Module detects a voltage greater than 36
RANGE • Drive State = PREVENTED volts on B+.
• Lift Up State =
PREVENTED
44156 POWER MODULE LOGIC VOLTAGE None 4_4
-INCORRECT AT POWER ON • Drive State = PREVENTED • Short to Battery was detected on the V5-5 OR the
Power Module detected a low voltage (1V < V5-5<
• Lift Up State = 14V) on its Ignition/Logic Input after power up.
PREVENTED
661 CANBUS FAILURE – POWER MODULE None 6_6
• Drive State = PREVENTED • The GM has lost CAN communication with thePower
Module. Verify if the Power Module Logic Input is
• Lift Up State = greater than 14 volts. Verify Continuity and
PREVENTED Impedance of the CAN lines to the Power Module.
996 POWER MODULE FAILURE - INTERNAL None 9_9
ERROR • Drive State = PREVENTED • The Power Module has detected an Internal Error
such as a Driver Failure. Reinstall software. If the
• Lift Up State = problem persists, Replace the Power Module.
PREVENTED
9950 POWER MODULE FAILURE - INTERNAL None 9_9
ERROR • Drive State = PREVENTED • The Power Module has detected an Internal Error
with the Power Module's internal memory. Cycle
• Lift Up State = Power or reinstall the latest Power Module soft-ware
PREVENTED to clear the fault. Verify integrity of the CAN
connection to the power Module. Replace the Power
Module.

• After completing the above steps if problem still


exist, replace the Power Module.
7775 POWER MODULE MOTOR WIRING -ISSUE None 7_7 The Power Module detects if Drive Motor outputs are
• Drive State = PREVENTED Shorted or Open Circuit. This can be caused by a short
circuit or open circuit in the motor wiring or within the
• Lift Up State = motor windings.
PREVENTED

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 197


Diagnostic Trouble Codes

DTC Help Message Alarm Flash Action Trigger


Code
33819 POWER MODULE PUMP WIRING -ISSUE None 3_3 The Power Module detects if Pump Motor output is
• Drive State = PREVENTED Shorted or Open Circuit. This can be caused by a short
circuit or open circuit in the motor wiring or within the
• Lift Up State = motor windings.
PREVENTED
7780 POWER MODULE – CAPACITOR BANK None 7_7 The Power Module is unable to correctly charge the
FAULT • Drive State = PREVENTED pump and drive motor drivers. Verify Power Module
voltage at B+ and Ignition/Logic Input are > 14 volts at
• Lift Up State = power up. Turn off the machine and verify voltage on B
PREVENTED +, Pump, Drive Motors, and Brake terminals are 0V with
respect to batter y ground. Replace the Power Module if
no damage is present on the wiring and no shorts or
open circuits are detected on the motors/brakes.

198 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


SECTION 8
GENERAL ELECTRICAL INFORMATION AND SCHEMATICS

CONTENTS
Paragraph Title Page
8.1 GENERAL........................................................................................................................................... 201
8.2 MULTIMETER BASICS ......................................................................................................................... 201
8.2.1 Grounding ...................................................................................................................... 201
8.2.2 Backprobing ................................................................................................................... 201
8.2.3 Min/Max......................................................................................................................... 201
8.2.4 Polarity .......................................................................................................................... 201
8.2.5 Scale.............................................................................................................................. 201
8.2.6 Voltage Measurement ...................................................................................................... 202
8.2.7 Resistance Measurement .................................................................................................. 202
8.2.8 Continuity Measurement .................................................................................................. 203
8.2.9 Current Measurement ...................................................................................................... 203
8.2.10 Continuity Measurement Over Long Distances..................................................................... 203
8.2.11 Requirements: ................................................................................................................. 204
8.2.12 Procedure....................................................................................................................... 204
8.3 APPLYING SILICONE DIELECTRIC COMPOUND TO AMP CONNECTORS ................................................... 204
8.4 DIELECTRIC GREASE APPLICATION...................................................................................................... 204
8.4.1 Installation...................................................................................................................... 204
8.4.2 AMP Mate-N-Lok ............................................................................................................. 205
8.4.3 AMP Faston .................................................................................................................... 205
8.4.4 AMP Micro-Fit ................................................................................................................. 205
8.4.5 AMP Mini Fit Jr ................................................................................................................ 205
8.4.6 Mini Fit Sr ....................................................................................................................... 206
8.4.7 DIN Connectors ............................................................................................................... 206
8.4.8 Exceptions ...................................................................................................................... 206
8.5 AMP CONNECTOR .............................................................................................................................. 207
8.5.1 Assembly........................................................................................................................ 207
8.5.2 Disassembly.................................................................................................................... 209
8.5.3 Wedge Lock.................................................................................................................... 209
8.5.4 Service - Voltage Reading ................................................................................................. 209
8.6 WORKING WITH DEUTSCH CONNECTORS ............................................................................................ 211
8.6.1 DT/DTP Series Assembly ................................................................................................... 211
8.6.2 DT/DTP Series Disassembly ............................................................................................... 211
8.6.3 HD30/HDP20 Series Assembly ........................................................................................... 212
8.6.4 HD30/HDP20 Series Disassembly ....................................................................................... 212
8.7 SWITCHES ......................................................................................................................................... 213

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 199


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.7.1 Basic Check..................................................................................................................... 213


8.7.2 Limit Switches ................................................................................................................. 213
8.7.3 Automatic Switches ......................................................................................................... 214
8.7.4 Switch Wiring - Low Side, High Side ................................................................................... 214
8.8 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS................................................................................................................... 215

200 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.1 GENERAL

This section contains schematics to be used for locating and correcting most of the operating problems which may develop. If a problem
should develop which is not presented in this section or which is not corrected by listed corrective actions, technically qualified
guidance should be obtained before proceeding with any maintenance.

NOTICE
It is a good practice to avoid pressure-washing electrical/ electronic components.
Should pressure-washing be utilized to wash areas containing electrical/electronic
components, JLG Industries, Inc. recommends a maximum pressure of 750 psi (52
bar) at a minimum distance of 12 inches (30.5 cm) away from these components. If
electrical/ electronic components are sprayed, spraying must not be direct and be
for brief time periods to avoid heavy saturation.

8.2 MULTIMETER BASICS

A wide variety of multimeters or Volt Ohm Meters (VOM) can be used for troubleshooting your equipment. A digital meter with
reasonable accuracy (within 7%) is recommended for the measurements in these procedures. This section shows diagrams of a common,
digital VOM configured for several different circuit measurements. Instructions for your VOM may vary. Please consult the meter
operator’s manual for more information.

8.2.1 Grounding
"Grounding the meter" means to take the black lead (which is connected to the COM (common) or negative port) and touch it to a good
path to the negative side of the voltage source.

8.2.2 Backprobing
To “backprobe” means to take the measurement by accessing a connector’s contact on the same side as the wires, the back of the
connector. Readings can be done while maintaining circuit continuity this way. If the connector is the sealed type, great care must be
taken to avoid damaging the seal around the wire. It is best to use probes or probe tips specifically designed for this technique,
especially on sealed connectors. Whenever possible insert probes into the side of the connector such that the test also checks both
terminals of the connection. It is possible to inspect a connection within a closed connector by backprobing both sides of a connector
terminal and measuring resistance. Do this after giving each wire a gentle pull to ensure the wires are still attached to the contact and
contacts are seated in the connector.

8.2.3 Min/Max
Use of the "Min/Max" recording feature of some meters can help when taking measurements of intermittent conditions while alone. For
example, you can read the voltage applied to a solenoid when it is only operational while a switch, far from the solenoid and meter, is
held down.

8.2.4 Polarity
Finding a negative voltage or current reading when expecting a positive reading frequently means the leads are reversed. Check what
reading is expected, the location of the signal and that the leads are connected to the device under test correctly. Also check that the
lead on the "COM" port goes to the ground or negative side of the signal and the lead on the other port goes to the positive side of the
signal.

8.2.5 Scale
M = Mega = 1,000,000 * (Displayed Number)
k = kilo = 1,000 * (Displayed Number)
m = milli = (Displayed Number) / 1,000
μ = micro = (Displayed Number) / 1,000,000
Example: 1.2 kΩ = 1200 Ω
Example: 50 mA = 0.05 A

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 201


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.2.6 Voltage Measurement

• If meter is not auto ranging, set it to the correct range (See multimeter’s operation manual).

• Use firm contact with meter leads

8.2.7 Resistance Measurement

• First test meter and leads by touching leads together. Resistance should read a short circuit (very low resistance).

• Circuit power must be turned OFF before testing resistance.

• Disconnect component from circuit before testing.

• If meter is not auto ranging, set it to the correct range (See multimeter’s operation manual).

• Use firm contact with meter leads.

202 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.2.8 Continuity Measurement

• Some meters require a separate button press to enable audible continuity testing.

• Circuit power must be turned OFF before testing continuity.

• Disconnect component from circuit before testing

• Use firm contact with meter leads.

• First test meter and leads by touching leads together. Meter should produce an audible alarm, indicating continuity.

8.2.9 Current Measurement

• Set up the meter for the expected current range.

• Be sure to connect the meter leads to the correct jacks for the current range you have selected.

• If meter is not auto ranging, set it to the correct range (See multi meter’s operation manual).

• Use firm contact with meter leads.

8.2.10 Continuity Measurement Over Long Distances


When trying to determine continuity of a harness or wire, longer than the reach of standard instrument leads, is possible to perform the
check without excessively long leads. Using the other wires in the harness one can determine the condition of a particular wire in the
harness.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 203


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.2.11 Requirements:
• Harness with at least three separate wires including the wire under test.

• These wires must be able to be isolated from other wires, etc.

• Jumper or method to connect contacts on one side of harness.

• Meter that can measure resistance or continuity.

8.2.12 Procedure
Test multimeter leads resistance. Subtract this value from the measured resistance of the wires to get a more accurate measurement.
Consult the circuit schematic to determine which wires to use in addition to wire under test, here called wire #1 and wire #2, and how to
isolate these wires. These wires should appear in the same connectors as the wire under test or are within reach of the jumper.

1. Disconnect all connections associated with the wire under test and the two additional wires. If harness is not completely isolated
disconnect battery terminals also, as a precaution.

2. Measure continuity between all three wires, the wire under test, wire #1 and wire #2. These should be open. If not, repair the
shorted wires or replace the harness.

3. On one side, jumper from contact of wire #1 and wire #2.

4. Measure continuity between wire #1 and wire #2. If there is continuity, both wires are good and can be used for this test. If there is
not continuity, either wire could be bad. Check connections and measurement setup. Redo measurement. If still no continuity,
repair wires or consult schematic for other wires to use for test.

5. Jumper from wire under test to wire #1.

6. Measure continuity. If there is continuity, the wire under test is good. Resistance of a wire increases as the length increases and as
the diameter decreases.

One can find the continuity of two wires, here #1 and #2, at once by following steps 1 through 4. If there is a problem the third wire is
used to troubleshoot the other wires. To find the problem, start at step 1 and use the entire procedure.

8.3 APPLYING SILICONE DIELECTRIC COMPOUND TO AMP CONNECTORS

Silicone Dielectric Compound must be used on the AMP connections for the following reasons

• To prevent oxidation at the mechanical joint between male and female pins.

• To prevent electrical malfunction caused by low level conductivity between pins when wet.

Use the following procedure to apply Silicone Dielectric Compound to the electrical connectors.

1. To prevent oxidation and low level conductivity, silicone dielectric grease must be packed completely around male and female
pins on the inside of the connector after the mating of the housing to the header. This is easily achieved by using a syringe to fill
the header with silicone dielectric compound, to a point just above the top of the male pins inside the header. When assembling
the housing to the header, it is possible that the housing will become air locked, thus preventing the housing latch from engaging.

2. Pierce one of the unused wire seals to allow the trapped air inside the housing to escape.

3. Install a hole plug into this and/or any unused wire seal that has silicone dielectric compound escaping from it.

8.4 DIELECTRIC GREASE APPLICATION

Dielectric grease helps to prevent corrosion of electrical contacts and improper conductivity between contacts from moisture intrusion.
Non-waterproof connectors benefit from the application of dielectric grease.

8.4.1 Installation
The following is general guidance for the installation of dielectric grease in a connector system.

204 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General Electrical Information and Schematics

• Use dielectric grease in a tube for larger connection points or apply with a syringe for small connectors.

• Apply dielectric grease to plug/male connector housing which typically contains sockets contact/female terminals.

• Leave a layer of dielectric grease on the mating face of the connector, completely covering each connector terminal hole. Refer the
pictures shown below.

• Assemble the connector system immediately to prevent moisture ingress or dust contamination.

The following connector systems are specifically addressed because of their widespread use at JLG. However, this guidance may be
applied to similar devices.

8.4.2 AMP Mate-N-Lok


This connector system is widely used inside enclosures for general-purpose interconnect. Follow the general guidance for installation.

8.4.3 AMP Faston


This connector system is typically used on operator switches at JLG. Follow the general guidance for installation.

8.4.4 AMP Micro-Fit


This connector system is typically used on control modules at JLG. Follow the general guidance for installation.

8.4.5 AMP Mini Fit Jr


This connector system is typically used on control modules at JLG. Follow the general guidance for installation.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 205


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.4.6 Mini Fit Sr


This connector system is typically used on control modules at JLG. Follow the general guidance for installation.

8.4.7 DIN Connectors


This connector is typically used on hydraulic valves. Follow the installation instructions

8.4.8 Exceptions
Some waterproof connector applications do benefit from dielectric grease, and some non waterproof connectors do not benefit from
dielectric grease.
In the exceptions below, we have found dielectric grease is not needed for some applications, and in some cases can interfere with the
intended connection. Dielectric grease shall be used as an exception in other applications.
Enclosures
Application of dielectric grease is not required in properly sealed enclosures. To meet criteria, the enclosure must be rated to at least
IP56 (dust protected; protected from powerful jets of water).
Carling Switch Connectors
Carling switches may experience high impedance, or discontinuity, due to silicone dielectric grease ingress when switching inductive
loads. Therefore, dielectric grease shall not be applied to Carling switch mating connectors unless specifically noted.
Scissor Platform Cable at the Platform Control
Some waterproof connectors are exposed to the elements when disconnected by the customer benefit from having protection using
dielectric grease.

206 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.5 AMP CONNECTOR

Figure 78. AMP Connector

8.5.1 Assembly
Check to be sure the wedge lock is in the open, or as shipped, position Refer to Figure - Connector Assembly Figure 1, page 207. Proceed
as follows:

Figure 79. Connector Assembly Figure 1

1. To insert a contact, push it straight into the appropriate circuit cavity as far as it will go Refer to Figure - Connector Assembly Figure
2, page 208.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 207


General Electrical Information and Schematics

2. Pull back on the contact wire with a force of 1 or 2 lb to be sure the retention fingers are holding the contact Refer to Figure -
Connector Assembly Figure 2, page 208.

Figure 80. Connector Assembly Figure 2

3. After all required contacts have been inserted, the wedge lock must be closed to its locked position. Release the locking latches by
squeezing them inward Refer to Figure -Connector Assembly Figure 3, page 208.

Figure 81. Connector Assembly Figure 3

208 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General Electrical Information and Schematics

4. Slide the wedge lock into the housing until it is flush with the housing Refer to Figure -Connector Assembly Figure 4, page 209.

Figure 82. Connector Assembly Figure 4

Figure 83. Connector Disassembly

8.5.2 Disassembly
1. Insert a 4.8 mm (3/16 in.) wide screwdriver blade between the mating seal and one of the red wedge lock tabs.

2. Pry open the wedge lock to the open position.

3. While rotating the wire back and forth over a half turn (1/4 turn in each direction), gently pull the wire until the contact is
removed.

Note: The wedge lock should never be removed from the housing for insertion or removal of the contacts.

8.5.3 Wedge Lock


The wedge lock has slotted openings in the forward, or mating end. These slots accommodate circuit testing in the field, by using a flat
probe such as a pocket knife. DO NOT use a sharp point such as an ice pick.

8.5.4 Service - Voltage Reading

CAUTION
Do not pierce wire insulation to take voltage readings.

It has been common practice in electrical troubleshooting to probe wires by piercing the insulation with a sharp point. This practice
should be discouraged when dealing with the AMP SEAL plug assembly, or any other sealed connector system. The resulting pinholes in
the insulation will allow moisture to invade the system by traveling along the wire strands. This nullifies the effectiveness of the
connector seals and could result in system failure.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 209


General Electrical Information and Schematics

Figure 84. Connector Installation

210 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.6 WORKING WITH DEUTSCH CONNECTORS

8.6.1 DT/DTP Series Assembly

Figure 85. DT/DTP Contact Installation

1. Grasp crimped contact about 25 mm behind the contact barrel.

2. Hold connector with rear grommet facing you.

3. Push contact straight into connector grommet until a click is felt. A slight tug will confirm that it is properly locked in place.

4. Once all contacts are in place, insert wedge lock with arrow pointing toward exterior locking mechanism. The wedge lock will snap
into place. Rectangular wedges are not oriented. Thy may go in either way.

Note: The receptacle is shown - use the same procedure for plug.

8.6.2 DT/DTP Series Disassembly

Figure 86. DT/DTP Contact Removal

1. Remove wedge lock using needle nose pliers or a hook shaped wire to pull wedge straight out.

2. To remove the contacts, gently pull wire backwards, while at the same time releasing the locking finger by moving it away from
the contact with a screwdriver.

3. Hold the rear seal in place, as removing the contact may displace the seal.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 211


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.6.3 HD30/HDP20 Series Assembly

Figure 87. HD/HDP Contact Installation

1. Grasp contact about 25 mm behind the contact crimp barrel.

2. Hold connector with rear grommet facing you.

3. Push contact straight into connector grommet until a positive stop is felt. A slight tug will confirm that it is properly locked in
place.

Figure 88. HD/HDP Locking Contacts into Position

Note: For unused wire cavities, insert sealing plugs for full environmental sealing

8.6.4 HD30/HDP20 Series Disassembly

Figure 89. HD/HDP Contact Removal

1. With rear insert toward you, snap appropriate size extractor tool over the wire of contact to be removed.

2. Slide tool along into the insert cavity until it engages contact and resistance is felt.

3. Pull contact-wire assembly out of connector.

212 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


General Electrical Information and Schematics

Figure 90. HD/HDP Unlocking Contacts

Note: Do Not twist or insert tool at an angle.

8.7 SWITCHES

8.7.1 Basic Check


The following check determines if the switch is functioning properly, not the circuit in which the switch is placed. A switch is functioning
properly when there is continuity between the correct terminals or contacts only when selected.

1. De-energize the circuit.

2. Isolate the switch from the rest of the circuit if possible. If not possible, keep in mind it may affect readings.

3. Access the terminals to the switch.

4. If the switch has two terminals:


a. Measure resistance across the terminals.
b. Change the switch position.
c. Measure resistance again with the leads in the same positions. If the meter was reading short, it should read an open. If the
meter was reading open it should read short.

5. If the switch has more than two terminals, consult the schematic or switch diagram to determine what terminals will be
connected. The test is similar to testing a switch with two terminals.
a. Place one meter lead on the common contact and the other on a different contact in the same circuit.
b. Cycle through all positions of the switch. The meter should read short only when the switch connects the two terminals and
open otherwise.
c. If the switch has more than one common contact repeat the process for that circuit.

8.7.2 Limit Switches


Limit switches are used to control movement or indicate position. Mechanical limit switches are just like manually operated switches
except that the moving object operates the switch. These switches can be tested the same way as a standard switch by manually
operating the sensing arm.
Another type of limit switch used by JLG is the inductive proximity switch, also referred to as a "prox switch". Inductive proximity
switches are actuated only by ferrous metal, (metal that contains Iron, such as steel) near the switch. They do not require contact, and
must be energized to actuate. These types of switches can be used to detect boom or platform position, for example. These switches
have a sensing face where the switch can detect ferrous metal close to it. To find the sensing face, take note how the switch is mounted
and how the mechanisms meet the switch. Test this type of switch as follows:

1. Remove proximate switch from its mount.

2. Reconnect harness if it was disconnected for step a, and turn on machine.

3. Hold switch away from metal and observe switch state in the control system diagnostics using the Analyzer. See vehicle or control
system documentation on how to do this.

4. Place sensing face of switch on the object to be sensed by the switch. If that is not available, use a piece of ferrous metal physically
similar to it. The switch state in the control system diagnostics should change.

5. When reinstalling or replacing switch be sure to follow mounting instructions and properly set the gap between the switch and
object sensed.

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 213


General Electrical Information and Schematics

8.7.3 Automatic Switches


If the switch is actuated automatically, by temperature or pressure for example, find a way to manually actuate the switch to test it. Do
this either by applying heat or pressure, for example, to the switch. These switches may need to be energized to actuate.

1. Connect instrumentation to monitor and/or control the parameter the switch is measuring.

2. Observe switch state in control system with the Analyzer. See vehicle or control system documentation on how to do this.

3. Operate system such that the switch actuates. This could be going over a certain pressure or temperature, for example. The state
indicated in the control system should change.

8.7.4 Switch Wiring - Low Side, High Side


When controlling a load, a switch can be wired between the positive side of the power source and the load. This switch is called a "high
side" switch. The switch supplies the power to the load. When a switch is wired between the negative side of the power source and the
load, it is a "low side" switch. The switch provides the ground to the load.
A low side switch will allow voltage to be present on the load. No power is applied because the switch is stopping current flow. This
voltage can be seen if the measurement is taken with one test lead on the load and the other on the battery negative side or grounded
to the vehicle. What is actually being measured is the voltage drop across the switch. This could mislead a technician into thinking the
load is receiving power but not operating. To produce an accurate picture of power or voltage applied to the load, measure voltage
across the load’s power terminals. Also, the technician can measure the voltage at both power terminals with respect to battery ground.
The difference between those two measurements is the voltage applied to the load.

214 31217455 ES1330L, ES1530L


8.8

ES1330L, ES1530L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MODEL NO. ES1330L, ES1530L

SHEET 1
SHEET 2:
CHASSIS HARNESS 1001246213/1001250696 NON-LSS
D D

SHEET 3:
POWER CABLES 1001237552, 1001244444
LIFT DOWN NON LSS 1001239373; W/ LSS 1001239374 SHEET 9:
ELECTRICAL SCHEMATICS

PLATFORM /AC CABLE 1001244432, 1001244445 ES1530L ES1330L PMDC TRACTION HARNESS 1001243255
PLATFORM CONTROL CABLE 1001241320, 1001241321 BATTERY CABLE KIT 1001243230, 1001243231
CHARGER INTERLOCK 1001207009
CHARGER INTERLOCK OVERRIDE 1001217387 SHEET 10: NOT APPLICABLE
C C
CHARGER DC CONNECTION 1001241489

SHEET 4:
BEACON (DUAL) 1001250078
PLATFORM CONTROL, COILED W/FST 1001202185
PLATFORM CONTROL, COILED 1001202184

31217455
MOBILE CONTROL 1001253738
PLATFORM EXTENSION LIMIT 1001252951

B B

SHEET 5:
PLATFORM BOX HARNESS 1001200819

SHEET6:

Figure 91. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 1 of 10


WORKLIGHTS CABLE 1001219244
QUICKWELDER CABLE 1001219740

SHEET 7:
A A
DATA LOGGER 1001221078

SHEET 8:
CHASSIS HARNESS 1001246214/1001250697 LSS

1001239898-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAF53480D

215
General Electrical Information and Schematics
216
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
CANbus Buss Bar
CONTACTOR B+ PMP CTRL B- TELEMATICS

1
1
1
2
3
4

02X
12X
32X
1
2
3
01
11
21
4
5
6
7
8
9
CHASSIS HARNESS (1001266213/1001250696) NON-LSS

SHEET 2
X154

351SM
YEL CAN1-6 HIGH
1
GRN CAN1-6 LOW

A5 472PI
2 FOR DIAGNOSTICS

A51 372PI
DNG 1 KLB
3 X46
YEL CAN1-3 HIGH
1

ESUF SME DNG


NGI LET 5-3 LEY

DNG LET 1-1 KLB


DNG LET 1-1 KLB
CHARGER INTERLOCK MAIN CONTROLLER GRN CAN1-3 LOW
V3 2

ESUF SCITAMELET
EDOM TLP 2-5-2 LEY
WHT 14 GND ALARM

RWP LET 11-2 DER


4 16 B 3
CONNECTS TO S3 C4 X285 YEL 3-14 GND ALARM IGN
D 5 15 A 4 D
BLK 1-14 GND ALARM GND YEL 3-27 MDI IGN MDI (Option)
6 14 C 5
OR S3 A2 WHT 18 CHARGING STAT
2 8 9 AH03 6

MRALA DNUORG

RWP 2 LEY
YEL 3-27 MDI IGN
1 7 12 7
X26 BLK 1-27 MDI GND BLK 1-27 MDI GND
9 11 8
SN56
10 17
WHT 72 GND ANGLE 1 WHT 72 GND ANGLE 1 BLK 1-40 HOURMETER GND BLK 1-40 HOURMETER GND
1 1 20 1
WHT 68 ANGLE 1 WHT 68 ANGLE 1
3 2 19 GD32-
WHT 70 5V ANGLE 1 WHT 70 5V ANGLE 1 WHT 40 HOURMETER WHT 40 HOURMETER
2 3 10 1
WHT 73 GND ANGLE 2 WHT 73 GND ANGLE 2 WHT 6 P MAIN CON
GD32+
RETEM RUOH

4 11 13 X22
WHT 69 ANGLE 2 WHT 69 ANGLE 2 WHT 101 MODE IP666 WHT 6 P MAIN CON CONNECTS
6 12 1 1
WHT 71 5V ANGLE 2 WHT 71 5V ANGLE 2 YEL 101 MODE PWR WHT 7-1 N MAIN CON TO X22A

ROSNES ELGNA
5 13 18 X275 2
YEL 3-4 INV IGN SHEET_9 B3
14 8 1
INVERTER SN68
15 6 2
BLK 1-3 TILT GND BLK 1-3 TILT GND
16 4 2
YEL 3-3 TILT IGN YEL 3-3 TILT IGN GND
17 5 1
YEL 2 PWR GRN CAN1-2 LOW B+
1 18 2 SW556-1 4
E-STOP WHT 62 BEACON YEL 3-28 BRK REL IGN YEL CAN1-2 HIGH CAN-L
SW06-1 1 19 7 1 3
CAN-H
ROSNES TLIT

YEL 2-1 GND EMS BLK 1-46 BEACON GND WHT 104 BRK RELEASE
2 2 20 3 SW556-2

NOCAEB
SW06-2 YEL 2-2 GND EMS LB03 V2 1
V1

ESAELER EKARB
BLK 1 GND CAN2L GRN CAN1-5 LOW
1 6
YEL 2-5 PLT MODE18AWG GRN CAN2-1 LOW YEL CAN1-5 HIGH CONNECTS
1 TO X654 C 2 5

Ω 021
SW07-1 YEL CAN2-1 HIGH CAN2H BLK 1-41 PLT GND
B 3 4 TO X58
YEL 2-2 GND EMS SHEET 11 YEL CAN1-1 HIGH CAN1H WHT 41 PLT PWR
1 A 8 3
SW07-B ZONE B6 GRN CAN1-1 LOW WHT 2-6 PLT MODE SHEET 3 D1
X654A 4 2

Ω 021
YEL 2-3 GND MODE YEL 2-3 GND MODE CAN1L YEL 2-5-1 PLT MODE
C 1 5 1 C
SW07-3 YEL 2-4 GND MODE WHT 23 RX
7 X27
WHT 24 TX
1 6

HCTIWSYEK
SW07-2

A5

772PI
General Electrical Information and Schematics

1 V4
SW07-B1 YEL 2-1 GND EMS BLK 1-41 PLT GND YEL CAN1-4 HIGH
8 16 SHEET_9-[1,C] OR SHEET_10-[1,B]
WHT 41 PLT PWR GRN CAN1-4 LOW
1 4 6 SHEET_9-[1,C] OR SHEET_10-[1,B]
SW07-4 5 14
18 15 IP619
YEL 3-35 PHP SW2 PWR YEL 3-35 PHP SW2 PWR FOR

ESUF SME TLP


19 3 1
WHT 5 LIFT UP SW WHT 5 LIFT UP SW YEL 3-34 PHP SW1 PWR YEL 3-34 PHP SW1 PWR
1 9 13 2
YEL 2-4 GND MODE WHT 4 LIFT DN SW WHT 2-34 PHP SW1 IP620 WHT 2-34 PHP SW1 ES1530L/1330L
2 10 12 3
WHT 4 LIFT DN SW BLK 1-33 LIFT UP GND WHT 2-35 PHP SW2 WHT 2-35 PHP SW2
3 1 2 4
PHP EVITCA

WHT 33 LIFT UP VLV YEL 3-10 PWR MOD IGN ONLY


4 2 5 SN11
WHT 20 P LIFT DN WHT 35 ST RIGHT VLV
5 3 20

HCTIWS TFIL
WHT 19 N LIFT DN BLK 1-35 ST RIGHT GND
6 13 19 X551A
SW02 YEL 3-10 PWR MOD IGN CONNECTS
16 18 1
WHT 7-1 N MAIN CON TO X551B
7 17 2

31217455
WHT 34 ST LEFT VLV ON SHEET_9 C2
HV02 17 10
BLK 1-33 LIFT UP GND BLK 1-34 ST LEFT GND
2 6 9
WHT 33 LIFT UP VLV

P U T FI L
1 15 8
14 7
BLK 1-65 AMBT ALM GND BLK 1-22 ANL GND
11 1
WHT 65 AMBT ALARM YEL 3-21 ANL IGN
12 11
WHT 2-6 PLT MODE YEL 3-5 TEL IGN
20 4
X24A V5
WHT 20 P LIFT DN
1
B WHT 19 N LIFT DN B
2

B42X OT
ST CENNOC
6D 3 TEEHS

Figure 92. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 2 of 10


DNG TFEL TS 43-1 KLB
VLV TFEL TS 43 THW
DNG THGIR TS 53-1 KLB
VLV THGIR TS 53 THW

30VH
40VH

2
1
2
1

STEER LEFT STEER RIGHT

DNG MLA TBMA 56-1 KLB


MRALA TBMA 56 THW
2
1

40HA
FOR ES1530L/1330L ONLY

NGI LNA 12-3 LEY


XR 32 THW
XT 42 THW
DNG LNA 22-1 KLB
A A

82X
1
2
3
4
ANALYZER AMBIENT ALARM

1001239898-D

MAF53490D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ES1330L, ES1530L
ES1330L, ES1530L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

PLATFORM /ARM CABLE ES1530L MODEL (1001237552)


PLATFORM /ARM CABLE ES1330L MODEL (1001244444) ES1530L, ES1330L MODEL

SHEET 3
GRN CANL GRN CANL
6 6
YEL CANH YEL CANH LIFT DOWN (1001239373)
CONNECTS TO X27 5 5
BLK GND BLK GND CONNECTS TO X60
4 4 X24B
SHEET2 C8 OR ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION SHEET 3 C1 WHT 20 P LIFT DN WHT 20 P LIFT DN
3 3 1 1
BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP OR SHEET 3 B1 WHT 19 N LIFT DN WHT 19 N LIFT DN
2 2 CONNECTS 2 2
SHEET8 C8 RED BATTP RED BATTP HV65
N D T FI L

1 1
D X58 X59 TO X24A D
DC CONNECTIONS DELTA Q (1001241489)
SHEET 2 B1
X284
B- CHARGER 1 1 BAT B-
BLK B- CHARGER
X283
X281
B+ CHARGER 1 1 BAT B+
WHT BAT_POS CHARGER
X282

LIFT DOWN W/ LSS 1001239374


X466
CHARGER INTERLOCK (1001207009) RED 20 P LIFT DN RED 20 P LIFT DN
1 1
BLK 19 N LIFT DN BLK 19 N LIFT DN
X286 CONNECTS 2 2
PLATFORM CONTROL CABLE (1001241320) CONNECTS TO BLU 60 PRES IGN HV65
N D T FI L

P 2 1 3
SHEET 2 D3 X26, GRN CHARGE INTERLOCK YEL 58 PRES 1
N 1 TO X438 4
SHEET 6 D3 X331 GRN 59 PRES 2
M X285 5 SN66
OR SHEET 9 D3 X439 SHEET 9 B1 ORG 61 GND PRES BLU 60 PRES IGN
L 6 1 PWR
RED 74 5V ORG 61 GND PRES
J 7 2 SIG2
CHARGER INTERLOCK OVERRIDE (1001217387) WHT 75 SIG GRN 59 PRES 2
K 8 3 GND
BLK 76 GND YEL 58 PRES 1
H X392 9 4 SIG1
ERUSSERP

120 Ω CONNECTS TO X298 3A BLK FUSE LEAD


G 2 1 10 SHLD
GRN CAN_LOW GRN CAN_LOW CONNECTS TO WHT CHARGE OVERRIDE
6 F 1 IP393 11
CONNECTS YEL CAN_HIGH YEL CAN_HIGH SHEET 5 C3 X285
5 E X391 12 SN469
BLK GND BLK GND RED 74 5V
TO X59 4 A A PWR
ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION BLK 76 GND
3 D B GND
SHEET 3 D3 BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP WHT 75 SIG
2 C C SIG
ROSNES

C RED BATT_POWER RED BATT_POWER


C
1 B
X60 X61

TEMP SENSOR CONNECTIONS DELTA Q (1001260628)

C1
TEMP SENSOR WHT
1
C2
BLK
1

PLATFORM CONTROL, W/OVER HEAD SWT AND FT SW (1001241321)

3
WHT PWR 26 WHT PWR 26
2 P
WHT OVR_HD_SIG WHT OVR_HD_SIG27
1 N

31217455
SW475 M
JUMPER
L
WHT 1 1 WHT FTSW 24
1 1 J
WHT 1 1 WHT FTSW 25
2 2 K
CONNECTS TO X298
SW63 H
120 Ω
G
GRN CAN_LOW GRN CAN_LOW SHEET 5 C3
6 F
YEL CAN_HIGH YEL CAN_HIGH
5 E
CONNECTS TO X59 BLK GND BLK GND
4 A
B ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION B
3 D
SHEET 3 D3 BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP
2 C
RED BATT_POWER RED BATT_POWER
1 B
X60 X61

Figure 93. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 3 of 10


A A

1001239898-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAF53500D

217
General Electrical Information and Schematics
218
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

BEACON 2
BEACON 1

SHEET 4
1
2

1
2
972BL

872BL
D D

PLATFORM CONTROL, COILED (1001202184)


P
N

NGI NOCAEB 26 THW


NGI NOCAEB 26 THW
M

DNG NOCAEB 64-1 KLB


DNG NOCAEB 64-1 KLB
L
J

883S
983S
K
H
CONNECTS TO X298
120 Ω
G
GRN CAN LOW GRN CAN LOW GRN CAN LOW GRN CAN LOW SHEET 5 C3
6 F
YEL CAN HIGH YEL CAN HIGH YEL CAN HIGH YEL CAN HIGH
5 E
CONNECTS TO X59 BLK GND BLK GND BLK GND BLK GND
4 1 2 A
ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION
3 D
SHEET 3 D3 BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP
2 C
RED BATT POWER RED BATT POWER RED BATT POWER RED BATT POWER
1 B HARNESS, MOBILE CONTROL
X60 X61
(1001245299)

CO587
YEL 3-5 TEL IGN
X23B 1
RED 2-1 TEL PWR
1 2
BLK 11-1 TEL GND S565 BLK 11-1 TEL GND
2 3
YEL 3-5 TEL IGN S566 3A S569
3 4
YEL 2-5-2 PLT MODE FC500 YEL CAN1-6 HIGH
4 5

NGI NOCAEB 26 THW


DNG NOCAEB 64-1 KLB
C GRN CAN1-6 LOW
C
6
PLATFORM CONTROL, COILED W/OVER HEAD SWT AND FT SW (1001223262) 7
YEL 2-5-2 PLT MODE

082X
4 8

1
2
YEL 3-5 TEL IGN
General Electrical Information and Schematics

3 3
YEL 11-1 TEL GND
WHT PWR 22 WHT PWR 22 CONNECTS TO LB03 ON SHEET 2 C3, 2
2 P RED 2-1 TEL PWR
WHT OVR HEAD SIG WHT OVR HEAD SIG 23 1
1 N OR SHEET 8 D3 X23A
SW475 M
L BEACON (DUAL)
WHT FT SW 20 WHT FT SW 20
1 J
WHT FT SW 21 WHT FT SW 21
2 K (1001250078)
SW63 H
CONNECTS TO X298 X154B
S567
120 Ω
YEL CAN1-6 HIGH
G A
GRN CAN1-6 LOW S568
GRN CAN LOW GRN CAN LOW GRN CAN LOW GRN CAN LOW SHEET 5 C3 B
6 F
YEL CAN HIGH YEL CAN HIGH YEL CAN HIGH YEL CAN HIGH C
5 E
CONNECTS TO X59 BLK GND BLK GND BLK GND BLK GND
4 1 2 A
ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION ORG IGNITION
3 D
SHEET 3 D3 BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP BLU E-STOP

31217455
2 C
RED BATT POWER RED BATT POWER RED BATT POWER RED BATT POWER C
1 B GRN CAN1-6 LOW
X60 X61 B
YEL CAN1-6 HIGH
A
X154A

B B

Figure 94. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 4 of 10


A A

1001239898-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAF53510D

ES1330L, ES1530L
General Electrical Information and Schematics

A
C

B
8

8
7

7
NROH ROO DTUO / ROO DNI

SW299-1

SW299-2

SW300-1

SW300-2
1

1
WHT 84 IN/OUT SIG
WHT 85 HORN SIG

YEL PWR

YEL PWR
02
6

6
91
81
GIS YOJ 09 THW
71
DNG YOJ 98 THW
61
V5 YOJ 88 THW

S304
51
GI S T HGI R T S 6 8 T HW
41 1
GI S T F E L T S 7 8 T HW TCELES TFIL 38 THW
PLATFORM MODULE

31 2
REGGIRT 2-34 THW RWP LEY
21 3

DRIVE/LIFT
MRALA TLP 08 THW TCELES EVIRD 28 THW
11 4
01 5
CETORP DAEH REVO 89 THW
9 6
TCELES TFIL 38 THW
8 203WS
TCELES EVIRD 28 THW
7
GIS NROH 58 THW
6
GI S TUO /N I 4 8 T HW
5 1
EVIRD SEIRES 18 THW EVIRD SEIRES 18 THW
4 2

PARALLEL/SERIES
WOL NAC 5-1 NRG RWP LEY
3 3
HGIH NAC 5-1 LEY
2 4
DNG TLP 14-1 KLB
1 5
RWP LEY
503X 6
S303

103WS
5

5
PLATFORM BOX HARNESS (1001200819)

TUPTUO 9
GIS YOJ 09 THW
8
DNG YOJ 98 THW
7
V5 YOJ 88 THW
6
V5 RWP LEY
JOYSTICK

5
L

GI S T F E L T S 7 8 T HW
4 1
GI S T HGI R T S 6 8 T HW MRALA TLP 08 THW
PLATFORM

3 -603HA
R

2 1
T

REGGIRT 1-34 THW RWP LEY


1 +603HA
V5 RWP LEY
592SJ
4

4
1
EDOM TLP 6-2 DER
PLATFORM

1-692WS
E-STOP

2
RWP TTAB 1-5-2 DER
2-692WS
WHT 98 OVER HEAD PROTEC

RED 2-5-1 BATT PWR


WHT 43-2 TRIGGER
WHT 43-1 TRIGGER

RED 2-6 PLT MODE


GRN 1-5 CAN LOW
YEL 1-5 CAN HIGH
BLK 1-41 PLT GND

YEL 3-41 PLT PWR


YEL PWR
3

3
X298
M

D
N

H
L
K

B
P

C
E
OR CONNECTS TO X473

OR CONNECTS TO X477
CONNECTS TO X61

OR SHEET 4, 1
SHEET 3 C3

SHEET 7 D7

SHEET 7 C7
2

2
1

SHEET 5 1001239898-D
D

A
C

MAF53520D

Figure 95. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 5 of 10

ES1330L, ES1530L 31217455 219


220
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

WORK LIGHT CABLE (1001219244)


BLK BLK

SHEET 6
2
SWITCH 1 RED WHT
1 1 B-
X395 X398 B+ QUICK WELDER (1001219740)
WHT
2
SWITCH 2 GRN 10A RED FUSE LEAD BLK 1AWG
1 1 B+ SIDE OF MAIN CONTACTOR 1 X400
X396 IP397 X399 X401 1
B- 2
D BLK 1AWG D
1
OF BATTERY STACK X402

HARNESS, OVER HEAD PROTECTION (1001224468) - 1932R,1532R


WHT PWR 15 (1001227728) - 4045R
2
WHT PWR 13
1
X503

WHT PWR 13
2
WHT OVR HD SIG 12
1
X504 3
WHT PWR 15 CONNECTS TO SW475
2
WHT OVR HD SIG 10
1 SHEET 7 D6 AND C6
X507
WHT OVR HD SIG 12
2
WHT PWR 11
1
C X505
C
General Electrical Information and Schematics

WHT PWR 11
2
WHT OVR HD SIG 10
1
X506

31217455
B B

Figure 96. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 6 of 10


A A

1001239898-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAF53530D

ES1330L, ES1530L
ES1330L, ES1530L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

SHEET 7
DATA LOGGER (1001221078)

D D

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
01
11
21
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
01
11
21

1JOC
2JOC
XT 7 THW
XR 8 THW

IH NAC 5 LEY

NGI 3 LEY
OL NAC 6 NRG

DNG 2 KLB
RWP 1 DER
IP420 X417 MS416

WS YALER 4 THW
1 1
WHT 4 RELAY SW
2 2
IP418 YEL 3-1 IGN
3 3 X423
IP419 YEL 3-3-1 IGN RED 1-1 PWR
4 4 1
WHT 8 RX
2
WHT 7 TX
3
BLK 2-3 GND
4

RED 1-2 PWR 87


5
RED 9 B+ 30
C 3 C
87a
4
BLK 2-1 GND 85
2
YEL 3-3-1 IGN 86
1

MS412 RL421

1
BLK 2-2 GND
2
BLK 2 GND
3
4 MS415
BLK 2-3 GND GRN 6-1 CAN LO

DNUORG
5 1
BLK 2-1 GND
6 2
GRN 6 CAN LO
11
GRN 6-2 CAN LO
12
YEL 5-1 CAN HI
3
4
YEL 5 CAN HI
9
YEL 5-2 CAN HI
raB ssuB 4 x 3

10

31217455
5
RED 1-1 PWR
6
RED 1-2 PWR
7
RED 1 PWR
8
MS413

1
YEL 3-2 IGN
2
YEL 3-1 IGN
3
YEL 3 IGN
4
B B

NOITINGI
5
6

Figure 97. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 7 of 10


X59 X60
WHT 10 BATT PWR WHT 10 BATT PWR
1 1
WHT 11 E-STOP WHT 11 E-STOP
2 2
YEL 12 IGN YEL 12 IGN
3 3
BLK 13 GND BLK 13 GND
4 4
YEL 5-2 CAN HI YEL 5-1 CAN HI
5 5
GRN 6-2 CAN LO GRN 6-1 CAN LO
6 6

X23
RED 9 B+
1
BLK 2-2 GND
2
YEL 3-2 IGN
3
4

A A

1001239898-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAF53540D

221
General Electrical Information and Schematics
222
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
BEACON CANbus Buss Bar
CONTACTOR B+ PMP CTRL B- TELEMATICS CHASSIS HARNESS (1001266214/1001250697) LSS

1
1
1
2
3
4
CHARGER INTERLOCK

12X
32X

02X
CONNECTS TO S3 C4 X285 OR S3 A2

1
2
3
01
11
21
4
5
6
7
8
9

1
2

2
1

SHEET 8
62X
X154

351SM
YEL CAN1-6 HIGH

30BL
1
GRN CAN1-6 LOW
2

A5 472PI
FOR DIAGNOSTICS

DNG 1 KLB
3 X46

A51 372PI
YEL CAN1-3 HIGH
1

NGI LET 5-3 LEY

DNG LET 1-1 KLB


DNG LET 1-1 KLB
MAIN CONTROLLER GRN CAN1-3 LOW
CO01-V3 2

ESUF SME DNG


RWP LET 1-2 DER

ESUF SCITAMELET
EDOM TLP 2-5-2 LEY
WHT 14 GND ALARM
14 16 B 3
YEL 3-14 GND ALARM IGN
D 15 15 A 4 D

NOCAEB 26 THW
BLK 1-14 GND ALARM GND YEL 3-27 MDI IGN
16 14 C 5
WHT 18 CHARGING STAT
8 9 AH03 6

DNG NOCAEB 64-1 KLB


TATS GNIGRAHC 81 THW
MRALA DNUORG

RWP 2 LEY
YEL 3-27 MDI IGN MDI (Option)
7 12 7
WHT 79 SIG2 BLK 1-27 MDI GND BLK 1-27 MDI GND
9 11 8
SN56
10 17
WHT 72 GND ANGLE 1 WHT 72 GND ANGLE 1 BLK 1-40 HOURMETER GND BLK 1-40 HOURMETER GND
1 1 20 1
WHT 68 ANGLE 1 WHT 68 ANGLE 1
3 2 19 GD32-
WHT 70 5V ANGLE 1 WHT 70 5V ANGLE 1 WHT 40 HOURMETER WHT 40 HOURMETER
2 3 10 1
WHT 73 GND ANGLE 2 WHT 73 GND ANGLE 2 WHT 6 P MAIN CON
GD32+
RETEM RUOH

4 11 13 X22
WHT 69 ANGLE 2 WHT 69 ANGLE 2 WHT 101 MODE IP666 WHT 6 P MAIN CON CONNECTS
6 12 1 1
WHT 71 5V ANGLE 2 WHT 71 5V ANGLE 2 YEL 101 MODE PWR WHT 7-1 N MAIN CON TO X22A

ROSNES ELGNA
5 13 18 X275 2
WHT 74 5V YEL 3-4 INV IGN SHEET_9 B3
4 8 1
WHT 75 SIG INVERTER SN68
5 6 2
WHT 76 GND BLK 1-3 TILT GND BLK 1-3 TILT GND
6 4 2
WHT 77 VSW YEL 3-3 TILT IGN YEL 3-3 TILT IGN GND
18 5 1
YEL 2 PWR WHT 78 SIGNAL GRN CAN1-2 LOW B+
1 17 2 SW556-1 4
E-STOP WHT 62 BEACON YEL 3-28 BRK REL IGN YEL CAN1-2 HIGH CAN-L
SW06-1 19 7 1 3
CAN-H
ROSNES TLIT

YEL 2-1 GND EMS BLK 1-46 BEACON GND WHT 104 BRK RELEASE
2 20 3 SW556-2
SW06-2 YEL 2-2 GND EMS
CO01-V2 1
GRN CAN1-5 LOW
CO01-V1 6

ESAELER EKARB
BLK 1 GND CAN2L YEL CAN1-5 HIGH CONNECTS
1 5
YEL 2-5 PLT MODE18AWG GRN CAN2-1 LOW BLK 1-41 PLT GND
1 TO X654 C 2 4 TO X58

Ω 021
SW07-1 YEL CAN2-1 HIGH CAN2H WHT 41 PLT PWR
B 3 3
YEL 2-2 GND EMS SHEET 11 YEL CAN1-1 HIGH CAN1H WHT 2-6 PLT MODE SHEET_3 D1
1 A 8 2
SW07-B ZONE B6 GRN CAN1-1 LOW YEL 2-5-1 PLT MODE
X654A 4 1

Ω 021
YEL 2-3 GND MODE YEL 2-3 GND MODE CAN1L
C 1 5 X27 C
SW07-3 YEL 2-4 GND MODE WHT 23 RX
7
WHT 24 TX
1 6

HCTIWSYEK
SW07-2

A5

772PI
MS575-1
YEL CAN1-4 HIGH
General Electrical Information and Schematics

1 1
CONNECTS
CO01-V4
SW07-B1 YEL 2-1 GND EMS BLK 1-41 PLT GND GRN CAN1-4 LOW TO MS575-2
8 16 2
WHT 41 PLT PWR ON SHEET_9 C2
1 4 6 3
SW07-4 5 14
18 15 IP619
YEL 3-35 PHP SW2 PWR YEL 3-35 PHP SW2 PWR FOR

ESUF SME TLP


19 3 1
WHT 5 LIFT UP SW WHT 5 LIFT UP SW YEL 3-34 PHP SW1 PWR YEL 3-34 PHP SW1 PWR
1 9 13 2
YEL 2-4 GND MODE WHT 4 LIFT DN SW WHT 2-34 PHP SW1 IP620 WHT 2-34 PHP SW1 ES1530L/1330L
2 10 12 3
WHT 4 LIFT DN SW BLK 1-33 LIFT UP GND WHT 2-35 PHP SW2 WHT 2-35 PHP SW2
3 1 2 4
PHP EVITCA

WHT 33 LIFT UP VLV YEL 3-10 PWR MOD IGN ONLY


4 2 5 SN11
WHT 20 P LIFT DN WHT 35 ST RIGHT VLV
5 3 20

HCTIWS TFIL
WHT 19 N LIFT DN BLK 1-35 ST RIGHT GND
6 13 19 X551A
SW02 WHT 60 PRES IGN YEL 3-10 PWR MOD IGN CONNECTS
16 18 1
WHT 58 PRES 1 WHT 7-1 N MAIN CON TO X551B
7 17 2

31217455
WHT 59 PRES 2 WHT 34 ST LEFT VLV ON SHEET_9 C2
HV02 17 10
BLK 1-33 LIFT UP GND WHT 61 GND PRES BLK 1-34 ST LEFT GND
2 6 9
WHT 33 LIFT UP VLV YEL 2-42 OVLD LIGHT IGN

P U T FI L
1 15 8
WHT 42 OVLD LIGHT SIG
14 7
BLK 1-65 AMBT ALM GND BLK 1-22 ANL GND
11 1
WHT 65 AMBT ALARM YEL 3-21 ANL IGN
X438 12 11
WHT 20 P LIFT DN WHT 2-6 PLT MODE YEL 3-5 TEL IGN
1 20 4
WHT 19 N LIFT DN CO01-V5
2
WHT 60 PRES IGN
3
B WHT 58 PRES 1 B
4
WHT 59 PRES 2
5
WHT 61 GND PRES
6
WHT 74 5V
7

664X OT
WHT 75 SIG

ST CENNOC
8

6C 3 TEEHS
WHT 76 GND
9
WHT 79 SIG2
10
11
12

Figure 98. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 8 of 10


SW470-2 IP623
WHT 77 VSW
DNG TFEL TS 43-1 KLB
VLV TFEL TS 43 THW
DNG THGIR TS 53-1 KLB
VLV THGIR TS 53 THW

WHT 78 SIGNAL
1
30VH
40VH

2
1
2
1

SW470-1

HCTIWS TUOTUC VRD WOL


STEER LEFT STEER RIGHT

NGI THGIL DLVO 24-2 LEY


G I S T H G I L D L V O 2 4 T HW
DNG MLA TBMA 56-1 KLB
MRALA TBMA 56 THW

-84BL
40HA

+84BL
1
1
2
1
FOR ES1530L/1330L ONLY

NGI LNA 12-3 LEY


XR 32 THW
XT 42 THW
DNG LNA 22-1 KLB
A A

82X
1
2
3
4
ANALYZER OVERLOAD LIGHT AMBIENT ALARM

1001239898-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAF53550D

ES1330L, ES1530L
ES1330L, ES1530L
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

ES1530L ES1330L DRIVE SYSTEM (PMDC)

SHEET 9
X579 X578
10A RED 50 BRAKE IN 16AWG
1 1
IP576
D 2 2 D

POWER MODULE COMBIACX / DUALPMX


CO573-J1
1
RED 51 BRAKE IN WHT 56 P RBRAKE RED 50 BRAKE IN 16AWG
2
WHT 54 P LBRAKE RED 52 BRAKE IN 16AWG RED BP1 B+ 2AWG
3 1
S577 WHT 57 N RBRAKE
4 CO573-BF+
5
BLK B- 2AWG
6 1
7 CO573-B-
8
WHT 55 N LBRAKE RED PUMP B+ 4AWG
9 1 +
YEL 3-10-1 PWR MOD IGN RED PUMP B+ 4AWG
10 CO573-B+ 1
11 - M
WHT 7 N MAIN CON BLK PUMP P- 4AWG BLK PUMP P- 4AWG
12 1 1
13 CO573-P-

ROTOM PMUP
X551B
CONNECTS YEL 3-10-1 PWR MOD IGN
1 14
TO X551A WHT 7 N MAIN CON
2 15
ON SHEET_2 B8
16
17
BLK RMOT U
18 1 MS568-A1
RED RMOT W
19 CO573-U 1
20 MS568-A2 M
RED LMOT V BLK RMOT U
21 1 1
C 22 CO573-V C
RED RMOT W WHT 57 N RBRAKE
23 2
BLK LMOT W WHT 56 P RBRAKE BRAKE
24 1 1
ROTOM EVIRD THGIR

25 CO573-W MS568-B
MS575-1 MS575-2 26
YEL CAN1-4 HIGH YEL CAN1-7 HIGH GRN CAN1-7 LOW
SHEET_2-[8,C] A A 27 CAN_L
GRN CAN1-4 LOW GRN CAN1-7 LOW YEL CAN1-7 HIGH
SHEET_2-[8,C] B B 28 CAN_H
C C 29
30
31 MS569-A1
RED LMOT V
32 1
33 MS569-A2 M
BLK LMOT W
34 1
35
WHT 55 N LBRAKE
NC 2
WHT 54 P LBRAKE BRAKE
1
ROTOM EVIRD TFEL

MS569-B

31217455
B B

CONNECTS
TO X22 2
SHEET 2/10 D7 1
X22A
RED BP1 B+ 2AWG
1
OUTPUT
RED B+ 2AWG
1

ROTCATNOC NIAM
B+

Figure 99. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 9 of 10


WITH BATTERY BATTERY DISCONNECT
DISCONNECT OPTION
1 1
FOR ALL MARKET

WITHOUT BATTERY
DISCONNECT OPTION

GWA4 KLB
ONLY FOR JAPAN
INTERLOCK

1
765X
AC

GWA2 -B KLB
DC

GWA4 DER

GWA2 +B DER
GWA4 KLB
TEMP

GULP CA

A052
665PI
TEMP SENSOR

1
1
1
1
BATTERY CHARGER
A A

12V BATTERY 12V BATTERY

2X 12V BATTERIES

1001239898-D

MAF53560D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

223
General Electrical Information and Schematics
224
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1001097347

SHEET 11
78
03
a78
58
68

78
03
a78
58
68
D X768 D
RED 2-1 TEL PWR
1

566LR
BLK 1-1 TEL GND
2
TO X23 TELEMATICS YEL 3-5 TEL IGN S587 2A
3
YEL 2-5-2 PLATF MODE IP590
4

885S
NGI LET 5-3 LEY

NGI LET 9-2 GRO


DNG LET 4-1 KLB

RWP LET 8-2 DER


DELTA Q CHARGER IC650
CO563-J1 CO563-C1
1 BAT TEMP - 1
2 AC

NGI LET 1-5-3 LEY


CO563-C2
3 BAT TEMP + 1
CO563-C3
INTERLOCK 1 CONNECTS TO X26 SHEET 2/8 ZONE D3
CO563-BAT POS

195PI
BATTERY POSITIVE 1 TO CONTACTOR B+ (SHEET 3 D5) X608A X608
RED 2-1-1 TEL PWR RED 2-1 TEL PWR 16AWG S585
CO563-BAT NEG 1 1
BLK 1-1 TEL GND BLK 1-1 TEL GND 16AWG
BATTERY NEGATIVE 1 TO BATTERY B- (SHEET 3 D5) 2 2 X601
YEL 3-5-2 TEL IGN S589 YEL 3-5-3 TEL IGN YEL 3-5 TEL IGN S586
3 3 1
YEL 2-5-2 PLATF MODE
CO563-COMM 4 4 2
CAN GND 1 3
ORG 2-9 TEL IGN
INTERLOCK NC 2 4
RED 2-5 INTL COM 2A
C INTERLOCK COM 3 5 C
RED 2-12 INTL NO S566 IP636 S567
INTERLOCK NO 4 6
RED 2-11 BATT TEMP+ GRN CAN2-3 CAN L
TEMP SENSE + 5 7
YEL CAN2-2 HIGH
CAN HI 6 8
1001125677 2 X 6 BUSS BAR
General Electrical Information and Schematics

BAT NEGATIVE 7 9
ENABLE / DISABLE 8 10
LINBUS 9 11
GRN CAN2-2 LOW TO PT7000
CAN LO 10 12

1
2
3
01
11
21
4
5
6
7
8
9
COMM PORT 11 13
LED + 12 14

085SM
LED - 13 15
BLK 1-5 BATT TEMP
TEMP SENSE - 14 16
X569 X569A X584A X584 17
YEL CAN2-2 HIGH YEL CAN2-2 HIGH YEL CAN2-3 HIGH YEL CAN2-3 CAN H YEL CAN2-3 CAN H
A A A A 18
GRN CAN2-2 LOW GRN CAN2-2 LOW GRN CAN2-3 LOW GRN CAN2-3 CAN L
B B B B 19
C C C C 20
21
22

31217455
BLK 1-3 TEL GND 16AWG
23
RED 2-7 TEL PWR 16AWG
24
X654
YEL CAN2-1 HIGH TO X654A
A
GRN CAN2-1 LOW
B SHEET 2/8
C
ZONE C3

SN575 SN575A 1001102771


RED 2-11 BATT TEMP+
1 1
B BLK 1-5 BATT TEMP B
2 2

HARNESS,CHARGER,24VDC,J1939 HARNESS, CAN SPLICE HARNESS, CLEARSKY CAN


(1001254028) (1001254027) (1001254026)

Figure 100. Electrical Schematic - Sheet 10 of 10


A A

1001239898-D
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

MAF53570D

ES1330L, ES1530L
Blank page
Corporate Office
JLG Industries, Inc.
1 JLG Drive
McConnellsburg, PA 17233-9533 USA
(717) 485-5161 (Corporate)
(877) 554-5438 (Customer Support)
(717) 485-6417
Visit our website for JLG Worldwide Locations.
www.jlg.com

You might also like